JP5920420B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device or the like is used to produce a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) or the like to improve the interest of games. The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when the game ball starts (wins) at the start port (start port), and is, for example, 3 × 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in each cell. More specifically, when a game ball wins a start opening, scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. To do. In such a variation effect, a device is devised to give the player a sense of expectation by executing an effect that suggests in advance that the game state (for example , winning) is advantageous to the player.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of entertainment.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 detects display information for displaying identification information, entrance means for allowing a game ball to enter, and detection of the entrance of the game ball into the entrance means. detection means for, when the input spheres game ball is detected by the detection means, and dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information composed of a plurality of the identification information on the display means It is those having the acquisition, if the incoming ball game ball is detected by the detecting means, and the ball entrance information acquisition means for acquiring input sphere information accompanying the ball entrance, by the ball entrance information acquisition means A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entered ball information, a pitch information storage means for storing the pitch information acquired by the pitch information acquisition means, and a pitch information storage means; Dynamic table of the identification information based on stored entry information When starting, the dynamic display time determination means for determining the dynamic display time, as the stop display mode in the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display execution means, a plurality of embodiments, including certain aspects from within a mode setting means for setting one of the mode corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery execution means, at the set stop display mode by the mode setting means, dynamic being executed by the dynamic display execution means while the stop display hand stage stopping displayed in the display unit display, dynamic display is stopped and displayed at the stop display mode corresponding to the lottery result of out by the dynamic display execution means is executed, before When new entry information is acquired by the entry ball information acquisition means, the stop display mode in the dynamic display already executed by the dynamic display execution means is the determined dynamic table. A change permission determination unit that determines whether or not the change to the predetermined mode can be performed within a time, and a dynamic display that is already executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the change permission determination unit determines that the change is possible In response to the dynamic display time determined by the first change means for changing the stop display mode to the predetermined mode and the dynamic display time determination unit, the change permission determination unit changes the stop display mode to the predetermined mode. The changeable period setting means for setting a period determined to be possible, and when the predetermined number or more of the entry information is stored in the entry information storage means, the predetermined manner by the first change means and a change limiting means for limiting the change, said predetermined manner, among the stop display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the out-stop in combination with a specific of a plurality of identification information predetermined This is a mode in which the display is stopped .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, display means for displaying identification information, entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, detection means for detecting entry of the game ball into the entry means, If the incoming ball game ball is detected by the detection means, which has a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information composed of a plurality of the identification information on the display means there are, in the case where entry ball game ball is detected by the detecting means, and the ball entrance information acquisition means for acquiring input sphere information accompanying the ball entrance, ball entrance information acquired by the ball entrance information acquisition means A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery, a pitch information storage means for storing the pitch information acquired by the pitch information acquisition means, and a pitch stored in the pitch information storage means When starting dynamic display of the identification information based on information And dynamic display time determination means for determining the dynamic display time, as the stop display mode in the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display execution means, from among a plurality of embodiments, including certain aspects, the lottery execution In the display means , a dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means in the aspect setting means for setting one aspect corresponding to the lottery result by the means, and the stop display aspect set by the aspect setting means. and stop display hand stage stopping displayed, while the dynamic display is stopped and displayed at the stop display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the off is performed by the dynamic display execution means, the entering-sphere information acquiring means When new entry information is acquired, the stop display mode in the dynamic display already executed by the dynamic display execution means is set within the predetermined dynamic display time. A change permission determination unit that determines whether the mode can be changed, and a stop display mode in the dynamic display that is already executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the change permission determination unit determines that the change is possible. A period determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode by the change enable / disable determining unit in correspondence with the first change unit changing to a predetermined mode and the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination unit A changeable period setting means for setting a change, and a change for restricting a change to the predetermined mode by the first change means when a predetermined number or more of the entry information is stored in the entry information storage means includes a limiting means, wherein the predetermined manner, among the stop display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the out-in a manner that said plurality of identification information are stopped and displayed in combination with a specific predetermined is there. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the display means is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize, so that the player can easily display the display means. There is an effect that it can be visually recognized.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the outline | summary of various counters and the special figure A and B reserved ball storage area. It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline of various counters. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the fluctuation pattern of a normal fluctuation effect, and the content of the effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the content of a continuous chance eye effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the reservation ball | bowl execution area typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the actual screen and effective line setting in case a display screen scrolls. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a miss chance eye, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a reach chance eye. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, (c ) Is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the maximum changeable period memory of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the outline of the changeable period in each fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation effect. It is the schematic which shows an example of the content of RAM of an effect control apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the special figure A and B stop symbol instruction | indication storage area and a stop symbol instruction execution area, (b) is the content of the special figure A and B reservation ball | bowl counter. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic which shows an example of the setting value and variation time memorize | stored in the special figure B stop symbol instruction | indication storage area, (b) is memorize | stored in the special figure A and B stop symbol instruction | indication storage area. It is the schematic which shows an example of the relationship between a setting value and a stop symbol, (c) is a setting corresponding to the winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main controller and the lottery result indicated by the command It is the schematic which shows an example with a value. (A) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table which is updated. (A) is schematic which shows an example of the content of a display symbol pattern memory, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus corresponding to the content of a display symbol pattern memory. . It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area sequential advance process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start winning process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start winning process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process of the main controller and the payout controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the audio lamp effect process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process of an production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the chance chance prohibition process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol pattern table update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol pattern generation area update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol instruction | indication storage process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous production start determination process of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect A start process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol replacement process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect B start process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect C start process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change production setting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol instruction | indication storage area progressive process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process of an effect control apparatus. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b) It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory after changing 3 symbols (after change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b) It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory after changing 3 symbols (after change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, first pitching holes A64, B640 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor (not shown) for pressing, a push button type stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the change of the signal. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It is. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, A ball entrance A64, a first ball entrance B640, a variable winning device 65, a second ball entrance 67 (through gate), a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion is the back side of the inner frame 12 Attached to. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port A64, the first winning port B640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B for mainly displaying the first symbol are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A includes The gaming state corresponding to the winning (entry) mainly to the first entrance A64 is displayed, and the first symbol display device 37B mainly wins (entry) to the first entrance B640. The corresponding game state is displayed.

  The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37Aa and a 7-segment display 37Ab, which are light emitting means. Similarly, the first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B both indicate the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in a lit state, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, in a short time, or in a normal state. The lighting state indicates whether there is any gaming state or whether it is changing. For example, the 1st symbol corresponding to “probable big hit”, the 1st symbol corresponding to “ordinary jackpot”, the 1st symbol corresponding to “out”, and the number of reserved balls are lit. Indicated by status. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, yellow, and blue) are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. Can suggest. In addition, the 7-segment indicators 37Ab and 37Bb both display the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol “first probability variation jackpot”, the first symbol “second probability variation jackpot”, the first symbol “ordinary jackpot”, the first symbol, There are four lottery results with the symbol “off”. Then, when winning at the first entrance A64 or the first entrance B640, the first symbol “first probability variation jackpot” or the first symbol “second probability variation jackpot”. Or whether the first symbol is “normal jackpot” or the first symbol is “out”.

  As a result of the lottery, if the pachinko machine 10 has the “first probability variation jackpot” of the first symbol or the “second probability variation jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is increased. The game state is easily shifted to the special game state (big hit), and the probability of winning the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased, and the electric accessory associated with the first entrance B640 (see FIG. 2) is kept for a predetermined time. Only in the open state, the ball enters the first entrance B640 and is in a game state that is easy to enter. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “probability change (probability change state)”.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol becomes a normal state, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the first entrance entrance The electric accessory attached to B640 is in an open state for a predetermined time, and the ball is in a game state where it is easy to enter the first entrance B640. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “short-time (short-time state)”, and states other than the probability change (probability change state) and the short-time (short-time state) are referred to as “normal state (normal state)”.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is “disconnected” in the first symbol, the state of the game that is neither probable nor short-lived (the state where neither the first symbol jackpot probability nor the second symbol hit probability has increased) Become. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the second symbol is increased during probability change or in a short time, but instead of changing the probability of winning the second symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Accordingly, it is possible to change the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance B640 or the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit.

  More specifically, the “first probability variation jackpot” of the first symbol in the present embodiment is a jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and then a jackpot of the first symbol (probability variation jackpot or Until the normal jackpot), the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases (15R probability variable jackpot) ).

  In addition, the “second probable jackpot” of the first design is the time after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds until the next jackpot of the first design (probable jackpot or normal jackpot) This is a jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot) in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases.

  In addition, the “normal jackpot” of the 1st symbol means that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the jackpot probability of the 1st symbol shifts to a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal) and a predetermined fluctuation A jackpot (15R normal jackpot) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased during the number of times (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first symbol “first probability variation jackpot” or the first symbol “second probability variation jackpot” is reached, the first symbol jackpot ( It is configured to increase the probability of hitting the second symbol until it becomes a probable jackpot or normal jackpot, but instead, for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), You may comprise so that the 2nd symbol hit probability may be raised.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol is reached, the hit probability of the second symbol is increased for a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 variation times). However, instead, it may be configured to continue increasing the probability of hitting the second symbol until the next big jackpot (probable big hit or normal jackpot) of the first symbol.

  In this embodiment, when the first symbol “first probable big hit” or the first symbol “ordinary big hit” is given, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, but the number of rounds is arbitrary. It is good also as a number (for example, 8 rounds, 16 rounds, etc.). Further, the number of rounds may be different between the “first probability variation jackpot” of the first symbol and the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol. For example, the maximum number of rounds may be 15 rounds in the case of “first probable big hit” of the first symbol, and the maximum number of rounds may be eight rounds in the case of “normal big hit” of the first symbol.

  In the following description, the “first probability variation jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “first probability variation jackpot”, and the “second probability variation jackpot” of the first symbol is simply “ The second probability variation jackpot is described, the “ordinary jackpot” of the first symbol is simply described as “ordinary jackpot”, and the “out” of the first symbol is simply described as “missing”.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance A64 or the first entrance B640 as a trigger. 3rd symbol display device 81, 2nd symbol display section 83 which consists of LED which variably displays 2nd symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere of 2nd entrance 67 (through gate), 2nd entrance There is provided a second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held through 67 (through gate).

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by an effect control device 117, which will be described later. For example, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower are displayed on the display screen. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ( (See FIG. 10). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged.

  In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 and the first symbol indicating the lottery result are displayed. A decorative display (variation effect) corresponding to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Also, after the jackpot lottery is started, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result (the first symbol indicating the first probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the second probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot, missed If a ball wins (enters) the first entrance A64 before any one of the first symbols indicating the symbol is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the winning (entry) ) The number of times is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37A and also in the number of lighting of the special figure A holding lamp 85A. Hereinafter, the number of holding times for the first entrance A64 is referred to as a special figure A holding ball number NA. Four special figure A holding lamps 85A are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the jackpot lottery is started, a stop symbol indicating the lottery result (the first symbol indicating the first probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the second probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot, If a ball wins (enters) the first entrance B640 before any one of the 1st symbols indicating disengagement is displayed on the 1st symbol display devices 37A, 37B, The number of balls) is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37B and also in the number of lighting of the special figure B holding lamp 85B. Hereinafter, the number of holdings for the first entrance B640 will be referred to as the special figure B holding ball number NB, and the total number of the special figure A holding ball number NA and the special figure B holding ball number NB will be referred to as the total holding ball. Called the number N. Four special figure B holding lamps 85B are also provided for the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the winning at the first entrance A64 and the winning at the first entrance B 640 are each held up to 4 times. It is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Moreover, the maximum number of times of holding may be different between the first entrance A64 and the first entrance B640. For example, the first entrance A64 may be held up to 4 times, and the second entrance B640 may be held up to 8 times.

  Further, the special figure A holding lamp 85A and the special figure B holding lamp 85B are deleted, and the number of times of the variable display holding based on the winning at the first entrance A64 or the first entrance B640 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A part may be displayed in numbers, or the area divided into four may be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of holding times. In addition, since the number of holdings is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special display A holding lamp 85A and the special figure B holding lamp 85B may not be turned on. Further, when the number of times of holding is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special display A holding lamp 85A and the special figure B holding lamp 85B may not be lit.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variation display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory associated with the first entrance B640 is in a predetermined time. Only in the open state, the sphere is configured to easily enter the first entrance B640.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. When the number of holdings is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B or the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol hold lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Further, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is deleted, and the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 is changed to a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number, or the four areas are different by the number of holding times. (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. In addition, the number of times the ball is held for the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 as in the case of the first entrance A64 and the first entrance B640, It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance A64 through which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance A64, the first entrance A switch 208a (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance A switch 208a is turned on. Due to the above, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  A first entrance B640 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the first entrance A64. When a ball enters the first entrance B640, the first entrance B switch 208b (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance B switch 208b is turned on. Due to this, the main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first entrance A64 and the first entrance B640 is also one of the winning entrances in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance A64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance B640. The number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general winning opening 63 is the same, but only a part of the winning opening 63 and the first winning openings A64, B640 may be different. However, different numbers may be used. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance A64 is 20, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance B640 and the general prize opening 63. It is good also as five. Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance A64 is 15, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance B640 is 10. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general prize opening 63 may be five.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening B640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery based on the winning at the first entrance A64 results in a big win. After a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A The LED 37Aa is turned on so as to be a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot.

  Similarly, in the main control device 110, if a lottery is made as a result of performing a lottery based on winning at the first entrance B640, the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is passed after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. Is turned on so as to be a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot.

  After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (a jackpot) that makes it easy for a ball to win, and a specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, wins a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 10 balls). Until you). The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is lit in a manner corresponding to the big hit, the specific winning a prize The opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is triggered for a predetermined period of time when the ball wins the specific winning opening 65a. A gaming state that is released a number of times may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning opening 63, the first winning openings A64, B640, and the specific winning opening 65a is guided to a not-shown ball discharge path through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110) and an effect control board (effect control device 117). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub-control device. To do. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Note that a command indicating the state of the sub control device may be transmitted from the sub control device to the main control device 110.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203, counters C1 to C3, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 to be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. A specific configuration of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 further includes a special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure A reserved ball counter 203d, a special figure B reserved ball counter 203e, An area 203f and a prefetch high probability state flag 203g are included. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 21), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a has a first per-random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5) and a first per-count when the ball wins (enters) the first entrance A64. The values of the type counter C2 (see FIG. 5), the first variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 5), the second variation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 5), and the third variation type counter CS3 (see FIG. 5) are set. It is a memory for storing each. In this special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to a single winning at the first entrance A64 (values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3) is stored up to four times (reserved). ) The specific configuration of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b has a first per-random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5) and a first per-count when the ball wins (enters) the first entrance B640. The values of the type counter C2 (see FIG. 5), the first variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 5), the second variation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 5), and the third variation type counter CS3 (see FIG. 5) are set. It is a memory for storing each. In the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, similarly to the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to one winning to the first entrance B640 (the counters C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3) are displayed. Each value) is stored (held) up to four times. The specific configuration of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b will also be described later with reference to FIG.

  Although details will be described later, a winning (entrance) to the first entrance A64 or the first entrance B640 is detected, and the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved ball storage area. When the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3 are stored (held) in 203b (that is, the special figure A holding ball number NA at the time of winning is less than 4, or the special figure B at the time of winning is held. When the number of balls NB is less than 4, the lottery result and the variation time are immediately based on the values of the stored counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3 separately from the start of the variation effect. To be acquired.

  In addition, immediately after the winning is detected, the lottery result and the changing time are acquired based on the data corresponding to the winning (each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3) separately from the start of the variation effect. In the following, it will be described that the lottery result and the variation time are prefetched. Then, as soon as the pre-reading is completed, whether the pre-read lottery result and the variation time and the pre-read data are based on the winning at the first entrance A64, or the winning at the first entrance B 640 is made. A winning information command including start opening winning information indicating whether it is based or not is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  For example, the start opening winning information is composed of 1 bit, and when the bit value is “0”, it indicates that the data is based on winning at the first entrance A64, and the bit When the value is “1”, it indicates that the data is based on winning in the first entrance B640.

  When the winning information command is received, the effect control device 117 acquires the lottery result, the variation time, and the start opening winning information included in the winning information command. Then, only when the starting entrance winning information indicates the first entrance B640, based on the acquired lottery result, variation time, etc., the stop symbol will be described later as “chance eye (out-of-stop stop symbol It is determined whether or not the variation effect (variation display) “1)” is continuously executed in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “continuous chance eye effect”). In other words, when the acquired starting entrance winning information indicates the first entrance A64, it is not determined whether or not to execute the continuous chance eye effect. The reason for this configuration will be described later.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, lottery results are transmitted instead of the respective values (random values) of the counters C1 and C2 by the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117. This is to prevent the main controller 110 from outputting each value (random value) of each counter C1 to C2. If each value (random number value) of each counter C1 to C2 is output, the output signal may be illegally stolen and each value (random number value) of each counter C1 to C2 may be analyzed. Since the lottery result is transmitted, the cheating can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to suppress analysis of an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is made from the output signal output from the main controller 110. Further, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not it is a big hit in the arithmetic and control unit 117, it is not necessary to store a table (not shown) storing random numbers for determining whether or not a big hit in the ROM 272. The free capacity of the ROM 272 can be increased.

  Specific examples of “chance eyes” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11A and 11B. In this embodiment, there are two types of “chance chance eyes” and “reach chance eyes”. Have a chance eye. In the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row in which three third symbols are displayed per row is displayed one row at each of the upper, middle, and lower stages, and a total of nine third symbols are stopped and displayed. Is done. Hereinafter, the symbol row displayed in the upper row is called the upper symbol row Z1, the symbol row displayed in the middle row is called the middle symbol row Z2, and the symbol row displayed in the lower row is the lower symbol row Z3. Called.

  The “off chance chance” is a stop symbol whose combination cannot be reached and corresponds to the same main symbol (“0” to “9”) in the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3. 10 types of character symbols) are included, and the stop symbols that are stopped and displayed are shown. The “reach chance” is a stop symbol that the combination of symbols reaches but does not win, and a specific main symbol (“4”) is displayed as the third symbol displayed in the center of the middle symbol row Z2. Or, a stop symbol on which a character symbol corresponding to the number “7” is stopped and displayed is shown. In the following description, when both “exit chance chance” and “reach chance eye” are indicated, or when either is indicated, only “chance eye” is described.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started to be “chance”, and further change the stop symbol that is in the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. It can be changed to “Chance Eye” during the production. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started execution is changed to “chance”, the chance that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance”, that is, one more chance Eyes can be displayed.

  In addition, since the stop symbol can be changed to “chance eyes” in the middle of the variation effect, when the winning information command is received, if the variation effect is being performed, a continuous chance effect can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing a continuous chance effect rather than changing only the stop pattern of a variable effect that has not yet started execution to “chance eye”, so that the player's expectation is improved. Can do. Further, by making the stop symbol “chance eyes”, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  The holding ball execution area 203c includes data (each value of each counter C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3) referred to when executing a process such as determination of jackpot or setting display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, This is a memory in which start opening winning information indicating whether the data is based on winning in the first winning slot A64 or winning in the first winning slot B 640 is stored. Note that the start opening winning information is composed of, for example, 1 bit, similarly to the starting winning information included in the above-described winning information command. When the bit value is “0”, it indicates that the data is based on winning at the first entrance A64, and when the bit value is “1”, the data is the first. It shows that it is based on winning a prize to the entrance B640.

  When the jackpot determination process is executed, data corresponding to each winning (stored in each counter C1 to C2, CS1) stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b described above. The data corresponding to one winning among each value of .about.CS3) is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in this embodiment means that the data is moved from the area where the data is stored to another area. The specific configuration of the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure A reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of winnings held for the first entrance A64, that is, the special figure A reserved ball number NA. The special figure B reserved ball counter 203e It is a counter that counts the number of times a prize is held for the ball outlet B640, that is, the special figure B number of held balls NB. Further, the special figure A and B holding ball counters 203d and 203e both have a maximum value of “4”, and are initialized to “0” when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 20).

  In the above-mentioned special figure A holding lamp 85A (see FIG. 2), the same number of lamps as the special figure A holding ball number NA are lit, and in the special figure B holding lamp 85B (see FIG. 2), the special figure B holding lamp is turned on. The same number of lamps as the number of balls NB are turned on. More specifically, one of the values of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA) and the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB). Is changed, the main control device 110 gives the production control device 117 a reserved number command indicating two values of the special figure A reserved ball number NA and the special figure B reserved ball number NB after one counter value changes. Is sent.

  In the effect control device 117, when the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the same number of lamps as the special figure A hold ball number NA indicated by the hold number command are displayed in the special figure A hold lamp 85A. Further, the same number of lamps as the special figure B reserved ball number NB indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure B hold lamp 85B.

  Each of the special figure A reserved ball number NA and the special figure B reserved ball number NB is one of five types (“0” to “4”), so the special figure A reserved ball number in the pachinko machine 10 There are 25 (5 types × 5 types) combinations of NA and special figure B reserved ball number NB, and 25 types of hold number commands are provided accordingly.

  In the present embodiment, the number-of-holds command is configured to indicate two values of the special figure A reserved ball number NA and the special figure B reserved ball number NB. Only one value of the reserved ball number NA and the special figure B reserved ball number NB may be shown. In this way, since only the information about the counter value whose value has changed can be transmitted by the hold number command, the amount of information transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 can be suppressed. Further, since the number of pending number commands is only ten, consumption of the storage area such as the ROM 202 can be suppressed.

  The work area 203f is an area for storing data related to the counters C1 to C3, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2 (for example, counter values and the like). The counters C1 to C3, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the work area 203f, and the value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203f.

  The prefetching high probability state flag 203g has a jackpot probability when prefetching the lottery result and the variation time based on the newly held winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3). This flag indicates whether winning data should be analyzed as being in a high probability state, or winning data should be analyzed as being in a low probability state (normal state). Further, the prefetch high probability state flag 203g is initialized to OFF when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 20).

  When the prefetching high probability state flag 203g is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and when the prefetching high probability state flag 203g is off, the jackpot probability is low. The winning data is analyzed as a probability state. In a general pachinko machine, a jackpot lottery is performed, and when the lottery result is “(first or second) probability variation jackpot”, then a jackpot (first or second probability variation jackpot, or The jackpot probability shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal) until it becomes a normal jackpot). On the other hand, when the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” or “off”, the jackpot probability shifts to a normal state.

  That is, the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the latest jackpot lottery result. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the newly held winning data is analyzed when it is held, and the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203g is sequentially updated according to the analyzed lottery result. Yes. As a result, after the new winning data is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, the lottery result is waited until the start of the variation effect corresponding to the new winning. Even if it is not acquired, when new winning data is acquired, the lottery result can be analyzed (pre-read) based on the state of the pre-reading high probability state flag 203g.

  In addition, as soon as the newly held winning data is acquired, the lottery result corresponding to the winning can be accurately acquired, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result can be transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, counter buffer, Each counter C1-C3, CS1-CS3, CINI1-CINI2, etc. are demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the outline of various counters, special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, and special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. FIGS. It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline of various counters C1, C2, CS1, CS2.

  Special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, counter buffer, counters C1 to C3, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 for setting the display of 37A, 37B, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 83, and the like.

  The jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B include a first per-random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a first hit type counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C1, the first variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation time of the variation effect, the second variation type counter CS2, and the third variation type counter CS3 is used. The second symbol random number counter C3 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C3. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated (returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value).

  Each of these counters C1 to C3, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 21), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203f of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and a special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. As described above, the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a has the counters C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (enters) the first entrance A64. The special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory for storing each value. When the ball wins (enters) the first entrance B640, each counter C1 to C1 It is a memory for storing each value of C2, CS1 to CS3.

  This special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). The four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a have a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a first A first variation type counter storage area 203a3, a second variation type counter storage area 203a4, and a third variation type counter storage area 203a5 are provided. The values of the counters C1 and C2 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 and 203a2, and the values of the counters CS1 and CS3 are stored in the storage areas 203a3 to 203a5.

  Similarly, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of the four holding areas stores a first per-random number counter. An area 203b1, a first per category counter storage area 203b2, a first variation type counter storage area 203b3, a second variation type counter storage area 203b4, and a third variation type counter storage area 203b5 are provided. The values of the counters C1 and C2 are stored in the storage areas 203b1 and 203b2, and the values of the counters CS1 and CS3 are stored in the storage areas 203b3 to 203b5.

  In this embodiment, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, the first per-random number counter storage areas 203a1 and 203b1 and the first per-type counter storage area 203a2 203b2, first variation type counter storage areas 203a3 and 203b3, second variation type counter storage areas 203a4 and 203b4, and third variation type counter storage areas 203a5 and 203b5 are provided. 203a5, 203b1 to 203b5 are not necessarily provided in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, and some of the five areas 203a1 to 203a5 and 203b1 to 203b5 are specially selected. It may be provided in the figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, and the rest may be provided in a new storage area.

  As described above, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each counter C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance A64 is stored for a maximum of four times. However, in that case, the data is sequentially from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Remembered. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  Further, in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance B640 is stored up to four times. However, in that case as well, data is sequentially from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Is memorized. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, when the big hit lottery is started, the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B is executed by the reserved ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 23). Data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (values of the counters C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3) are shifted to the areas 203c1 to 203c5 of the reserved ball execution area 203c, respectively. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 24), and the lottery winning result is determined based on the reference data, and the fluctuation display and stop corresponding to the lottery result are performed. The display is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the like.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. For example, the first per-random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 2309, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 2309) and then returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2309), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically, for example (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance A64. The value is stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, and is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance B640, and the value is reserved in the special figure B hold It is stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203b1 of the sphere storage area 203b.

  The probability of winning a jackpot is different between a low probability (when the jackpot probability is normal) and a high probability (when the jackpot probability is higher than normal). Each time is set individually. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), there are seven random numbers that are big hits at a low probability (when the big hit probability is normal), and the value is “0 to 6”. . In addition, there are 70 random numbers that are jackpots at a high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and the value is “0 to 69”.

  Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot at a low probability is “1/330” regardless of the winning at the first entrance A64 or the winning at the first entrance B, and the probability of winning a jackpot at a high probability is It is “1/33” regardless of the winning at the first entrance A64 or the winning at the first entrance B. It should be noted that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is duplicated at a low probability and a high probability, but it is determined whether or not it is a big hit at a low probability and a high probability. Random values may be set so that the random numbers to be determined do not overlap. Thereby, cheating can be suppressed. That is, if there is a random value that is a big hit regardless of whether the probability is high or low, there is a risk that the value is input from the outside and the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, since the random number value that is a big hit can be made difficult to be predicted by changing the random number value that is a big hit depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability or a low probability, it suppresses fraud can do.

  Further, the first hit type counter C2 determines one type of jackpot (whether it is the first probability variation jackpot, the second probability variation jackpot, or the normal jackpot). In the embodiment, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 19), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance A64. The value is stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, and is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance B640, and the value is reserved in the special figure B hold. It is stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the sphere storage area 203b.

  The distribution of the jackpot type is different between the case where the ball wins the first entrance A64 and the case where the ball wins the first entrance B640, and the case where the ball wins the first entrance A64. The ball is set individually for each case where the ball wins the first entrance B640. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the ball wins the first entrance A64, there are seven random numbers that become the first probability variation jackpot, and the value is “0-6”. " Similarly, the number of random numbers that become the second probability variation jackpot is 6 and its value is “7 to 12”, and the number of random numbers that usually becomes jackpot is 7 and its value is “13 to 19”. " On the other hand, when the ball wins the first entrance B640, the number of random numbers that becomes the first probability variation jackpot is 12, and the value is “0 to 11”, which is the second probability variation jackpot. The number of random numbers is two and the values are “12, 13”. The number of random numbers that are usually big hits is six and the values are “14 to 19”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C <b> 2 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that “big hit” and “first positive change big win” based on the data acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance A64, B640, “first positive change” “Big jackpot” is determined as “big jackpot” and “second probability variation jackpot”, and “second probability variation jackpot” is determined, and “big jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot” are determined as “normal jackpot”.

  In addition, the probability of becoming the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) at the time of the big hit becomes “7/20” when winning the first entrance A64, and when winning to the first entrance B640, “ 3/5 ". In addition, the probability of becoming the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) at the time of the big hit becomes “3/10” when winning the first entrance A64, and when winning to the first entrance B640, “ 1/10 ". In addition, the probability of a big jackpot (15R normal jackpot) at the time of a big win is “7/20” when winning the first entrance A64, and “3/10” when winning the first entrance B640. "

  Therefore, the player who is awarded the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance B640 is given to the player, rather than the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance A64. The game value is likely to increase. Thereby, the player will be delighted depending on whether the first entrance to be awarded is the first entrance A64 or the first entrance B640, and the player will have a high interest game. Can be provided.

  Next, the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the third variation type counter CS3 will be described. First, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 will be described. . Each of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (ie 99), returns to 0. Yes. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 21) to be described later is executed once, for example. It is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time.

  The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance A64, and the value is obtained from the first variation type counter storage area 203a3 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a. Is stored in the second variation type counter storage area 203a4, and is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance B640, and the value is stored in the first variation type counter storage area 203b of the first variation type counter storage area 203b. It is stored in the area 203b3 and the second variation type counter storage area 203b4.

  In the present embodiment, the rough variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the first variation type counter CS1. As the rough variation time of the symbol variation, four times of “11 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “40 seconds”, and “60 seconds” are provided. That is, when the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect in which the rough variation time of the symbol variation is any one of the four described above is executed.

  Although there are four types of rough variation times of symbol variation, the variation effect pattern (variation pattern) executed in the third symbol display device 81 is “outside variation”, “outside long variation”, “ There are five types of “normal reach fluctuation”, “super reach fluctuation”, and “special reach fluctuation”. Hereinafter, the five variation effect variation patterns are referred to as normal variation effect variation patterns.

  More specifically, “outward fluctuation” indicates a fluctuation effect in which the rough fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is 11 seconds regardless of the stop symbol, and “outward long fluctuation” indicates reach in the stop symbol. Without changing, it shows a variation effect in which the rough variation effect of the symbol variation is 20 seconds. Similarly, “normal reach fluctuation” indicates a fluctuation effect in which a reach occurs in a stop symbol and a rough variation effect of the symbol variation is 20 seconds. “Super reach variation” indicates a reach in a stop symbol. This is a variation effect in which the rough variation effect of the symbol variation is 40 seconds, and “special reach variation” indicates that the reach occurs in the stop symbol and the rough variation effect of the symbol variation is 60 seconds. It shows the fluctuating production.

  Note that “outside fluctuation” is executed only when the lottery result is out of place, and “outside long fluctuation” is that the lottery result is “second probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit)” and a specific continuous chance. It is executed only when the eye effect (continuous effect B described later) is executed. Further, “normal reach fluctuation”, “super reach fluctuation”, and “special reach fluctuation” are executed regardless of the lottery result.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the variation pattern of the variation effect provided in this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern of a normal variation effect and the contents of the effect. In the present embodiment, there are provided five patterns as fluctuation patterns of fluctuation effects, namely, deviation fluctuation, deviation long fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the case of out-of-range fluctuation, a stop symbol is displayed 11 seconds after the production (for example, high-speed fluctuation) is started. In the same manner, in the case of out-of-range long fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation, a stop symbol is displayed 20 seconds after the execution of the effect starts, 40 seconds in super reach fluctuation, and 60 seconds in special reach. Normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation each generate a reach in the stop pattern and perform a flashy production (hereinafter referred to as “reach fluctuation”) to achieve a gaming state advantageous to the player. It has a sense of expectation. In this embodiment, after the start of execution of normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation, reach fluctuation starts when 10 seconds elapse until the fluctuation effect ends (until the stop symbol is displayed). It is executed continuously.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, an example of the content of the continuous chance effect produced by the combination of the variation patterns described above will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the content of a continuous chance eye effect. In this embodiment, three patterns of a continuous effect A, a continuous effect B, and a continuous effect C are provided as the effect patterns of the continuous chance eye effect.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the continuous performance A is composed of two deviation fluctuations and one reach fluctuation (that is, a normal reach fluctuation, a super reach fluctuation, and a special reach fluctuation). An out-of-range change in which the symbol becomes a “chance” is executed twice in succession, a reach change is subsequently executed, and a stop symbol is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the continuous production A is executed, the transition to the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) or the normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot) is always made. Yes. Similarly, even if one or both of the two deviation fluctuations are reach fluctuations, a stop symbol that becomes a “chance” is displayed in the reach fluctuation.

  In addition, the continuous effect B is composed of two deviation fluctuations and one deviation long fluctuation. When the execution is started, the deviation fluctuation in which the stop symbol is “chance” is executed twice in succession. Subsequently, the detachment and long fluctuation are executed, and “chance eye” is displayed as the stop symbol. In the present embodiment, after the continuous performance B is executed, the second probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit) is surely shifted. Similarly, even if one or both of the two deviation fluctuations are reach fluctuations, a stop symbol that becomes a “chance” is displayed in the reach fluctuation.

  The continuous effect C is composed of one deviation variation and one reach variation (that is, a normal reach variation, a super reach variation, and a special reach variation). The out-of-eye variation that is “eye” is executed, and then the reach variation is executed, and the stop symbol is displayed. Similarly, even if one deviation fluctuation is a reach fluctuation, a stop symbol that becomes a “chance” is displayed in the reach fluctuation.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is continued. The second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) from when the reach occurs until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, each symbol of the middle symbol row Z2) stops. In the present embodiment, the time from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the final stop symbol is determined as the reach time for each variation pattern of the above-described variation effect. Then, according to the random number value of the second variation type counter CS2, any one of the three times “± 0 seconds”, “+0.5 seconds”, and “−1 second” is selected and selected. The added time is added to or subtracted from the reach time.

  For example, when the variation time “+0.5 seconds” is selected according to the random number value of the second variation type counter CS2, the third symbol display is performed as compared with the case where the variation time is “± 0 seconds”. In the device 81, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is scroll-displayed by two symbols. However, the same stop symbol is displayed as when the variation time is “± 0 seconds”. On the other hand, when the variation time “−1 second” is selected, the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is one symbol in the third symbol display device 81 as compared with the case where the variation time is “± 0 second”. Scrolls less than a minute. However, the same stop symbol is displayed as when the variation time is “± 0 seconds”. Thus, based on the variation time determined by the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the third display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the effect control device 117. The symbol reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined. Therefore, a variety of variation effects can be easily realized by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2.

  In the present embodiment, the pattern variation mode is determined by the combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2. However, the pattern variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1. It is also possible to determine the same or to determine the mode of symbol variation by the combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. For example, each symbol variation mode generated by the combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 of the present embodiment is associated with the value of the first variation type counter CS1 in advance. The mode of symbol variation may be determined only by the one variation type counter CS1. Further, for example, for each stop symbol, any one of the three times “± 0 seconds”, “+0.5 seconds”, and “−1 seconds” is associated in advance, and the first variation type The mode of symbol variation may be determined by a combination of the counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Each variation time is selected (determined) from four variation times (“11 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “40 seconds”, “60 seconds”) based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The winning ratio is set separately for each of the winning lottery results when the first probability variation jackpot, the second probability variation jackpot, the normal jackpot time, and the loss. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), when the lottery result of the winning prize is the first probability variation big hit (at the time of 15R probability variation big hit), there is no random number value that becomes “11 seconds”. The number of random numbers for “20 seconds” is 20, and the value is “0-19”. The number of random numbers for “40 seconds” is 30, and the value is “20-49”. The number of random numbers for “60 seconds” is 50, and the value is “50 to 99”.

  Further, when the winning lottery result is the second probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit), there is no random number value that is “11 seconds”, “40 seconds”, and “60 seconds”. "Seconds" is always selected. That is, the number of random numbers for “20 seconds” is 100, and the value is “0 to 99”.

  In addition, when the winning lottery result is a normal big hit (15R normal big hit), there is no random number value for “11 seconds”, and there are 40 random numbers for “20 seconds”. The number of random numbers for “40 seconds” is 30 and the value is “40 to 69”, and the number of random numbers for “60 seconds” is 30. The value is “70 to 99”.

  In addition, when the winning lottery result is out, the number of random numbers for “11 seconds” is 85, and the value is “0 to 84”. Similarly, the number of random numbers for “20 seconds” is 10, the value is “85 to 94”, the number of random numbers for “40 seconds” is 3, and the value is “95 to 94”. 97 ”, the number of random numbers for“ 60 seconds ”is two, and the value is“ 98, 99 ”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random value for determining one rough variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the first variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It has been.

  On the other hand, each variation time is selected (determined) from three variation times (“± 0 seconds”, “+0.5 seconds”, “−1 second”) based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The ratio is individually set for each combination of the winning lottery result and the variation time determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (d), when the lottery result is the first probability variation big hit time (15R probability variation big hit time), the variation time determined based on the value of the counter C1 is “20 seconds. ”Or“ 40 seconds ”, the fluctuation time“ ± 0 seconds ”is always selected. That is, there are 100 random numbers having a variation time of “± 0 seconds”, and the value is “0 to 99”. Similarly, when the lottery result is the first probability variation big hit time (15R probability variation big hit time) and the variation time determined based on the value of the counter C1 is “60 seconds”, the variation time is “± 0. The number of random numbers for “second” is 80, and the value is “0 to 79”. The number of random numbers for which the variation time is “−1 second” is 20, and the value is “80 to 99”. "

  In addition, when the lottery result is the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), the variation time “± 0 seconds” is always selected. That is, the number of random numbers having a variation time of “± 0 seconds” is 100, and the value is “0 to 99”. When the lottery result is a normal big hit (15R normal big hit) and the variation time determined based on the value of the counter C1 is “20 seconds” or “40 seconds”, the variation time “± 0” Seconds are always selected. That is, the number of random numbers having a variation time of “± 0 seconds” is 100, and the value is “0 to 99”.

  In addition, when the lottery result is a normal big hit (15R normal big hit) and the variation time determined based on the value of the counter C1 is “60 seconds”, the variation time becomes “± 0 seconds”. The number of random numbers is 80, the value is “0 to 79”, the number of random numbers whose variation time is “−1 second” is 20, and the value is “80 to 99”. Yes.

  In addition, when the lottery result is out, the number of random numbers whose variation time is “± 0 seconds” is 40, the value is “0-39”, and the variation time is “+0.5 seconds”. The number of random numbers of “30” is 30 and its value is “40 to 69”, the number of random numbers whose variation time is “−1 second” is 30, and its value is “70 to 99”. It has become. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random value that determines one variation time from the value (random number value) of the second variation type counter CS2 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Next, the third variation type counter CS3 will be described. The value of the third variation type counter CS3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). The value of the third variation type counter CS3 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 21) described later is executed once, for example, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The value of the third variation type counter CS3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance A64, and the value is stored in the third variation type counter storage area 203a5 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, it is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance B640, and the value is stored in the third variation type counter storage area 203b5 of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this Embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of 1st symbol display device 37A, 37B, and slides the symbol which is changing besides the fluctuation | variation of a symbol. Or a notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for the notice effect are provided, and when the notice effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the time required for executing the notice effect is added or subtracted. The variation time of the variation effect is adjusted (for example, +1 second, +2 seconds, −1 second, ± 0 seconds). Then, a notice effect is executed according to the adjustment time (extended time or shortened time). The extension time or shortening time necessary for executing this notice effect is selected according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3.

  A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one extension time or shortening time necessary for executing the notice effect from the value of the third variation type counter CS3 (random number value) Whether the state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d ( Depending on the special figure A reserved ball number NA), the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB), start opening winning information (bit value “0” or bit value “1”), etc. Thus, a plurality of tables are provided so that the selection ratio of each effect pattern changes. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the third variation type counter CS3. . Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  In the present embodiment, main controller 110 transmits a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command to instruct the effect control device 117 to change the variation effect to be executed. The variation pattern command is a command that indicates a variation pattern of variation effects to be executed (such as a deviating variation, a deviating long variation, a normal reach variation, a super reach variation, or a special reach variation). The variation pattern command is individually provided for each variation time determined by the combination of the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Since this variation pattern command is a command corresponding to the variation time of the variation effect to be executed, in other words, it is also a command indicating the variation time.

  The effect time addition command is a command indicating the extension time or shortening time necessary for executing the notice effect, and is provided individually for each extension time or shortening time determined by the value of the third variation type counter CS3. It has been. Since the notice effect is executed according to the extended time or the shortened time, the effect time addition command is also a command indicating the pattern of the notice effect.

  The second random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In particular, when the second random number counter C3 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C3. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C3 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball. Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. The number of winning random numbers is 149, and the value is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C3 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C3 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  Next, the reserved ball execution area 203c and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the reserved ball execution area 203c. As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203c is data (reference values of the counters C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3) that are referred to when processing such as jackpot determination and display setting of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed. ), And start opening winning information (bit value “0” or “0”) indicating whether the data is based on winning in the first entrance A64 or winning in the first entrance B640. A bit value “1”).

  The reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. The first per-random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per-type counter storage area 203c2, the first variation type counter storage area 203c3, and the second variation A type counter storage area 203c4, a third variation type counter storage area 203c5, and a start opening prize information storage area 203c6 are provided. When the jackpot determination process is executed, one of the above-described reserved first area of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and the reserved first area of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is set in one area. The stored data (values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3) are shifted to the areas 203c1 to 203c5 of the reserved ball execution area 203c, respectively.

  For example, when data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a to the reserved ball execution area 203c, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 of the reserved first area is stored The sphere execution area 203c is shifted to the first per random number counter storage area 203c1. Similarly, the random number value in the first per-kind counter storage area 203a2 is shifted to the first per-kind counter storage area 203c2, and the random value in the first fluctuation-type counter storage area 203a3 is shifted to the first fluctuation-type counter storage area 203c3. The random number value in the second variation type counter storage area 203a4 is shifted to the second variation type counter storage area 203c4, and the random value in the third variation type counter storage area 203a5 is shifted to the third variation type counter storage area 203c5. Shifted. In addition, since the shift is performed in the same manner when data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b to the reserved ball execution area 203c, the description thereof is omitted.

  Further, when data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is based on winning in the first entrance A64. The starting opening winning information (for example, bit value “0”) indicating that there is the information is stored in the starting opening winning information storage area 203c6. On the other hand, when data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is based on winning in the first entrance B640. Start opening winning information (for example, bit value “1”) indicating that there is a certain amount is stored in the starting opening winning information storage area 203c6.

  The data shift is executed by a holding ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, but both the special figure A holding ball storage area 203a and the special figure B holding ball storage area 203b are held. When data is stored in one area, the data stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is always prioritized and shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. Hereinafter, the fact that data is always preferentially shifted is referred to as data being preferentially shifted.

  Here, the reason why the data stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is preferentially shifted is that a lottery with a high game value advantage is always given priority (priority). . As described above, when a big win lottery is made in the main controller 110, a win to the first entrance B640 is made rather than a big win lottery based on a win to the first entrance A64. When the jackpot lottery is performed based on the above, the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot probability variation jackpot) is likely to increase, and the game value given to the player is likely to increase.

  Therefore, when the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance A64 and the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance B640 are respectively made, the winning at the first entrance B640 is made. By giving priority to the jackpot lottery based on the game, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a jackpot having a high game value advantage will be won. Therefore, the game performance can be improved and the player's willingness to enter the first entrance B640 can be increased, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the continuous chance effect based on the winning lottery result only when winning (winning) to the first entrance B640 is detected. This determination is made, and if a winning (entering ball) to the first entrance A64 is detected, the determination is not performed. This is to prevent a difference in game value given to the player from occurring depending on how the player's ball is shot.

  For example, even when a winning (entrance) to the first entrance A64 is detected or a winning (entrance) to the second entrance B640 is detected, based on the lottery result of each winning. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous chance eye effect. Then, based on the pre-reading of the winning (entering) to the first entrance A64, when the continuous chance eye effect is started, the player who has knowledge of the characteristics of the gaming machine 10 is the first Since the probability of the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) is “7/20”, in order to increase the probability of the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) is increased. The ball is going to be won (entered) at the first entrance B640, which is likely to be a big hit (the probability is "3/5").

  However, in the present embodiment, only when a winning (winning) to the first entrance B640 is detected, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect based on the winning lottery result. Since this is done, it is possible to prevent the player's method of driving the ball from changing depending on whether or not the player has knowledge such as the characteristics of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, each player can enjoy the game fairly.

  In addition, it is assumed that only the winning (entry) for the first entrance A64 is put on hold, and based on the prefetching of the winning (entrance) to the first entrance A64, the continuous chance eye effect is started. . Then, since it turns out that the player who has knowledge of the characteristic of the gaming machine 10, etc. has the possibility of shifting to a probable big hit, he stops driving the ball to know the result. This is because, even when the consecutive chance eye effect based on the pre-reading of the winning (entering) at the first entrance A64 is being executed, the winning (entering) at the first entrance B 640 is detected. The lottery (variation effect) executed according to the winning (winning) to the first entrance B640 is preferentially executed, and the display of the result of whether or not to shift to the probable big hit is postponed. Because it will end up.

  However, in the present embodiment, only when a winning (winning) to the first entrance B640 is detected, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect based on the winning lottery result. Since this is done, it is possible to prevent the player's method of driving the ball from changing depending on whether or not the player has knowledge such as the characteristics of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, each player can enjoy the game fairly. Moreover, since it can suppress that a player stops driving | injecting a ball | bowl, it can also suppress that the operating rate of a game machine falls.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data corresponding to the winning at the first entrance A64 and the data according to the winning at the first entrance B640 are distinguished. Are stored (held) in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. Therefore, when the data is shifted from the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a to the reserved ball execution area 203c, the start opening winning indicating that the shifted data is based on the winning at the first entrance A64. Information (bit value “0”) can be stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. In addition, when the data is shifted from the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b to the reserved ball execution area 203c, the start opening prize indicating that the shifted data is based on the winning at the first entrance B640. Information (bit value “1”) can be stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c.

  Therefore, when executing the process corresponding to the winning prize that has been suspended (variation start process (see FIG. 24)), for example, whether the fluctuation display is won to the first entrance A64 or to the first entrance B640. Depending on whether a prize has been won, one of the first symbol display device 37A and the first symbol display device 37B can be switched to display a lottery result or the like. In addition, when a decorative variation display corresponding to the variation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed on the third symbol display device 81, whether the variation mode is won in the first entrance A64 or not. It can also be changed depending on whether or not a winning is made at 1 entrance B640. For example, it is possible to change the scroll direction of the variable display in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction according to the winning first entrances A64, B640.

  When the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203c is completed, one of the holding first area of the special figure A holding ball storage area 203a and the holding first area of the special figure B holding ball storage area 203b is selected. Since the area becomes empty, each reserved area (second to second reserved ball storage area 203a or special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is stored by a forward holding ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 23) described later. A shift process is performed in which the data stored (holded) in (4) is packed in the hold area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, in the special figure A reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved sphere storage area 203b, data is stored only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Shift.

  Here, the data shift in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d is “4” and data is stored in all the reserved areas (first to fourth) of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a. In this state, when the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first area becomes empty, the data of the other reserved areas (second to fourth) are Shifted to one smaller reserved area (first to third).

  That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. . For example, if the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d is “2”, only the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, and the data shift is thus completed. The data shift in the special figure B reserved sphere storage area 203b is performed in the same manner as the data shift in the special figure A reserved sphere storage area 203a, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden. In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to a reservation area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of data stored in the special figure A reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special figure B reserved sphere storage area 203b (the number of reservations) is expressed as a special figure A reserved sphere counter 203d, and The special figure B reserved ball counter 203e is used for counting, and when a new winning occurs at the first entrance A64, the value indicated by the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA). The data corresponding to the new winning is stored in the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) according to the game, and if a new winning occurs at the first entrance B640, the special figure B is held. Data corresponding to a new winning is stored in a holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) according to a value (special figure B holding ball number NB) indicated by the ball counter 203e.

  Therefore, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the new winning is not overwritten with the data stored (held) in the reserved area. Therefore, after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area, the data in the shift source area can be left as it is without being cleared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden as compared with the case of clearing the data of the shift source area after the data shift. Note that the data in the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  In the present embodiment, when data is stored in both the first reserved area of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and the first reserved area of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, The data stored in the first reserved area of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is preferentially shifted (always given priority) to the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data may be shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c.

  In the present embodiment, data corresponding to winnings at the first entrances A64 and B640 is divided into two areas, a special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a and a special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. However, it may be configured to store together in one area (for example, a holding ball storage area is provided). In this case, eight holding areas are provided in the holding ball storage area, and each holding area includes the first per-random number counter storage area, the first per-type counter storage area, and the first variation type counter. In addition to the storage area, the second variation type counter storage area, and the third variation type counter storage area, a start opening prize information storage area is further provided.

  When data corresponding to the winning at the first entrance A64 is stored in one holding area, the data is won at the starting entrance winning information storage area of the holding area at the first entrance A64. The start opening winning information (for example, bit value “0”) indicating that it is based on the above is stored. On the other hand, when data corresponding to winning at the first entrance B640 is stored in one holding area, the data is won at the starting entrance winning information storage area of the holding area at the first entrance B640. The start opening winning information (for example, bit value “1”) indicating that it is based on is stored.

  Thereby, the data corresponding to the winning at the first entrance A64 and the data according to the winning at the first entrance B 640 are distinguished and stored (held) together in the holding ball storage area. it can. In addition, when shifting the data memorize | stored in each holding area in a holding ball storage area to a holding ball execution area, the data in each storage area of a holding 1st area are corresponded in a holding ball execution area. Shift to each storage area.

  Moreover, when comprised in this way, it is data in an order from the area with a small area number (1st-8th) in the vacant area of 8 reservation areas (hold 1st area-hold 8th area). Each time new data is stored in the holding area, the data stored in each holding area is rearranged. For example, if the newly stored data is based on winning at the first entrance B640, the data is repeatedly shifted to an area with a smaller area number. If data based on winning in the first entrance B640 is stored in an area with a smaller area number, the shift ends. As a result, when storing data based on winning at the first entrance A64 and data based on winning at the first entrance B640, the smaller the area number, the first entrance It is possible to store data that is based on winning in the mouth B640 and that corresponds to winnings that are older in time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variation effect (variation display) is executed will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen scrolls.

  As described above, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the effect control device 117 described later, and three symbols of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed on the display screen. A column is displayed. Each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is constituted by three third symbols. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row (virtual symbol reel) by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols. Details of the virtual symbol reel will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit is generated after the variable display is finished. Has been. When shifting to “first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)” or “second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)”, the main symbol corresponding to the odd number (“probability variation jackpot symbol (high probability symbol)”) Equivalent) is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to “normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot)”, a variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “normal jackpot symbol (low probability symbol)”) are aligned.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row in which three third symbols are displayed per column is displayed one column at each of the upper, middle, and lower stages. Is done. Then, for each of the upper, middle, and lower levels, the 3rd symbol (main symbol and sub symbol) is scrolled from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) with a periodicity (horizontal scrolling), and thereafter The third symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper, lower and middle stages, and finally a total of nine third symbols are stopped and displayed.

  As described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed in the upper row, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the middle row, and the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed in the lower row. When such horizontal scrolling is performed, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the numbers of the main symbols. Arranged to appear in ascending order.

  In addition, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines. In each game, when a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on one of the active lines when the scrolling display that scrolls horizontally is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot. Is displayed. Note that after the variable display is started, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11A and 11B, “chance eyes (missing chance eyes, reach chance eyes)” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the “off chance chance” displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 11B shows “reach” displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a "chance eye".

  First, the “off chance chance” will be described. As described above, the “off chance chance” is a stop symbol that does not reach the symbol combination, and the same main symbol is displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. It is a stop symbol that is stopped. In FIG. 11A, the “turtle” symbol is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Reach has not occurred in any of the five effective lines L1 to L5.

  In this embodiment, in this way, the combination of symbols does not become reach, and the stop symbol on which three identical symbols (here, “turtle”) are displayed is regarded as the “miss chance”. Yes. In the example shown in FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is “turtle”. A pattern (for example, “shark” or “octopus”) may be used.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “disappearance chance” shown in FIG. 11A is an example, and the stop position of the same main symbol is not limited to this. For example, even when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a “miss chance”.

  Next, the “reach chance” will be described. As described above, the “reach chance” is a stop symbol that is a combination of symbols that cannot be reached, but in the middle of the middle symbol row Z2, “Dugong” or “shark” (“4”). Or the main symbol corresponding to the number “7” is displayed and stopped. In FIG. 11B, the symbols “angel fish” (hereinafter referred to as “A fish”) are displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3. The symbol “shark” is displayed in the middle line L2 of the symbol row Z2. Furthermore, “Dugong” is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3.

  That is, reach has occurred in L4 and L5 among the five effective lines L1 to L5, but it is not a hit, and the symbol “shark” is displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. Yes. In this embodiment, in this way, the combination of symbols is a reach but not a hit, and “dugong” or “shark” (“4” or “7”) is added to the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. The stop symbol in which the main symbol corresponding to the number is displayed as the “reach chance”.

  Note that the above “reach chance” shown in FIG. 11B is an example, and the stop position of the main symbol to be reached is not limited to this. For example, the same main symbol is displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, and reach occurs, so that the hit does not occur and the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2 , “Dugong” or “shark” (the main symbol corresponding to the number “4” or “7”) is also displayed as “reach chance”.

  In the present embodiment, as a stop symbol pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned “disappearance chance eyes” and “reach chance eyes”, a “probability variable jackpot symbol” indicating a probability variable jackpot. Or, a “normal jackpot symbol” indicating a normal jackpot, a “rear-rear-reach reach symbol” indicating a back-and-forth off-reach, a “reach pattern other than front-back off” indicating a reach other than a back-and-forth miss, or a “completely missed symbol” indicating a complete miss Is provided. The “completely missed pattern” includes the above-described “miss chance eye”, and the “front / rear miss reach symbol” and the “reach pattern other than front / rear miss” include “reach chance eye”.

  Here, returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37A, a first symbol display device 37B, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a switch group (not shown). Solenoid 209 including various switches 208 including a sensor group and a sensor, a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close about the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like. Is connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, on the condition that the touch sensor (not shown) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The production control device 117 is configured to output audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, set the number of lamps to be turned on in the special figure A hold lamp 85A and the special figure B hold lamp 85B, It controls the setting of lighting and extinguishing of the lamp in the display lamp 34 and the like, and the variation effect (variation display) and the jackpot effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. These controls are executed based on various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. For example, the control related to the lighting and extinguishing of the lamps in the special figure A hold lamp 85A and the special figure B hold lamp 85B is executed based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280. An MPU 271 is connected to the input / output port 277 via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 includes a main controller 110, an image controller 274, an audio output device 226, a special figure A hold lamp 85A, a special figure B hold lamp 85B, an illumination unit 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, and the like. Are connected to each other.

  In addition, a character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control of sound output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of variation effect (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although it is configured to be performed by the production control device 117, various controls may be performed by being shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the voice lamp control device controls the sound output and the lighting and extinction of various lamps, and controls the control of the third symbol variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. You may comprise so that it may be performed with an apparatus.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory. The ROM 272 of the effect control device 117 includes a virtual symbol reel memory 272a and a maximum changeable period memory 272b. In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, a virtual symbol reel indicating the arrangement of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored for each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. In the maximum changeable period memory 272b, the maximum period during which the change effect stop symbol started to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “maximum changeable period”). Is stored). Note that the period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol is simply referred to as a changeable period.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 12A to 12C, the virtual symbol reel memory 272a of the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, and FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3.

  In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, a virtual symbol reel indicating the arrangement of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored for each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Memory. As described above, the arrangement of the third symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is determined for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers "and a sub-pattern (shell design in this embodiment) formed smaller than the main design. Yes. One virtual symbol reel indicates the arrangement of the third symbol in one symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the virtual symbol reel in the upper symbol row Z1 is composed of 18 third symbols. From the top to the back, the symbols are arranged as follows: "shellfish", "crab (9)", "shellfish", "A fish (angelfish) (8)", ..., "shellfish", "octopus ( 1) ", and array numbers indicating the arrangement of the virtual symbol reels are assigned from 1 to 18 in the symbol sequence. In addition, after the last “octopus (1)” symbol, it returns to the first symbol and repeats in the order of “shellfish”, “crab (9)”, “shellfish”,.

  The numbers enclosed in parentheses with the name of the character symbol indicate the number corresponding to the character symbol. For example, the symbol “crab” is the symbol corresponding to the number “9”. Show. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the upper symbol row Z1, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the upper symbol row Z1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), the virtual symbol reel in the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 third symbols. The arrangement of the symbols is the opposite of the arrangement of the upper symbol row Z1, and from the head toward the rear, “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”,. 9) "and" shellfish ". And the array element number which shows arrangement | positioning in a virtual symbol reel is attached | subjected from 1 to 18 in the arrangement | sequence order. In addition, after the last “shellfish” symbol, it returns to the top symbol and repeats in the order of “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”,. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the lower symbol row Z3, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub-symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the lower symbol row Z3.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the virtual symbol reel in the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 third symbols, and the symbol arrangement is the same as the arrangement of the virtual symbol reels in the lower symbol row Z3. It is an arrangement with two symbols, “shark (4)” and “shellfish” added at the end. Then, as in the case of the virtual symbol reels in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the next symbol after the final “shellfish” is returned to the top symbol, and “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “ Haresenbon (2) ”,... Is repeatedly repeated in this order. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the middle symbol row Z2, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the middle symbol row Z2.

  Next, the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the contents of the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117, and FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the changeable period in each variation pattern of the variation effect. It is.

  The maximum changeable period memory 272b is a memory in which a maximum period (maximum changeable period) in which a change effect stop symbol started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol is stored. is there. As shown in FIG. 13, the maximum changeable period is uniformly stored for 10 seconds regardless of the variation pattern of variation effects (out-of-range variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, special reach variation). In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 13, there is no outlier long variation. In outlier long variation, a predetermined stop symbol (“chance eye”) is always displayed. This is because it is not done in the first place.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, for example, as a normal variation effect pattern (see FIG. 7), for example, a deviation variation (11-second effect), a long-out variation (20-second effect), a normal reach variation (for 20 seconds). Production), Super Reach Variation (40 seconds production), Special Reach Variation (60 seconds production). The overall time of the variation effect varies depending on the variation pattern of the variation effect, but the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 10). The time until the first upper symbol row Z1 stops (9 seconds) and the time until the second lower symbol row Z3 stops (10 seconds) are the same.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 14, when the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) is executed, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (see FIG. 10) are immediately Start high-speed fluctuation. Thereafter, the upper symbol row Z1 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation after 8 seconds and stopped after 9 seconds, and the lower symbol row Z3 is simultaneously with the stop of the upper symbol row Z1 (that is, after 9 seconds). It changes in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation and stops after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower symbol row Z3 stops (that is, after 10 seconds) and stops after 11 seconds.

  Therefore, even after the upper symbol row Z1 of the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is switched from the high speed fluctuation to the medium speed fluctuation, or after the middle speed fluctuation is changed to the low speed fluctuation, the middle・ If the third symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol (the main symbol contained in the upper symbol row Z1) is included in each of the lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3, a variation effect is being produced. The stop symbol can be changed from “completely missed symbol” to “miss chance”. That is, even if the upper symbol row Z1 starts the medium speed fluctuation (after 8 seconds) after the start of the deviation fluctuation, if the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are changing at high speed (less than 9 seconds), the middle symbol row By replacing (changing) the third symbol of Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the detachment variation to the “miss chance”.

  Therefore, in addition to the period (less than 8 seconds) in which all of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the lower symbol row Z3 is changed after the upper symbol row Z1 is changed at medium speed. Also during the period before the medium speed fluctuation (less than 9 seconds), the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect can be changed to a changeable period that can be changed to another stop symbol. Therefore, the changeable period can be secured longer than the case where only the period (less than 8 seconds) in which all the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed is set as the changeable period. Therefore, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance eye production can be increased.

  Furthermore, if the same main symbol is contained in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, the same main symbol. However, the third symbol may be changed so as to fall within the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, even after the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed fluctuation to the medium speed fluctuation after the start of the deviation fluctuation, or after the medium speed fluctuation is changed to the low speed fluctuation, If the symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed (less than 10 seconds), the stop symbol of the detachment change can be changed to the “off chance chance” by replacing (changing) the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2.

  Therefore, in addition to the period (less than 8 seconds) in which all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed after the upper symbol row Z1 is changed at medium speed. The period before the medium speed fluctuation (less than 10 seconds) can also be changed to a changeable period in which the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect can be changed to another stop symbol. Therefore, if the same main symbol is included in each of the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, the changeable period is further increased. Since it can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the chance of performing the continuous chance eye production accordingly.

  As described above, among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, the changeable period is 9 seconds or 10 depending on the combination of the main symbols included in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3. Second. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of 10 seconds is stored in the maximum changeable period memory 272b as the maximum changeable period.

  Regardless of deviation fluctuation (11 seconds), in each fluctuation effect, the first upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation for 1 second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds, and further to low speed fluctuation. This is a margin period provided for surely executing control processing such as switching and stopping. Similarly, in order to reliably execute control processing such as switching the second lower symbol row Z3 from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation and then switching to low speed fluctuation for 1 second from 9 seconds to 10 seconds. It is a margin period provided in. In the case of deviation fluctuation, control processing such as switching the third middle symbol row Z2 from high-speed fluctuation to medium-speed fluctuation and then switching to low-speed fluctuation for 1 second from 10 seconds to 11 seconds. This is a margin period provided for surely executing.

  In addition, here, as an example, the changeable period in the deviation fluctuation has been described, but the changeable period is the same for other fluctuation patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, when the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is executed, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1 immediately after the start of the execution, as in the case of the deviation fluctuation. , Z2 and Z3 start high-speed fluctuations, the upper symbol row Z1 changes in the order of medium-speed fluctuation and low-speed fluctuation after 8 seconds, and stops after 9 seconds, and the lower symbol row Z3 stops the upper symbol row Z1. At the same time (that is, after 9 seconds), the medium speed change and the low speed change are switched in this order, and the operation stops after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower symbol row Z3 stops (that is, after 10 seconds). Thereafter, the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues for 10 seconds, and then the stop display is performed.

  Also, when the super reach fluctuation (40 seconds) is executed, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 change at high speed immediately after the start of execution, as in the case of the deviation fluctuation. The upper symbol row Z1 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation after 8 seconds and stopped after 9 seconds. It changes in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation to stop after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower symbol row Z3 stops (that is, after 10 seconds). Thereafter, the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues for 30 seconds, and then the stop display is performed.

  Also, when special reach fluctuations (60 seconds) are executed, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 change at high speed immediately after the start of execution, as in the case of outlier fluctuations. The upper symbol row Z1 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation after 8 seconds and stopped after 9 seconds. The lower symbol row Z3 is simultaneously with the upper symbol row Z1 being stopped (that is, after 9 seconds). It changes in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation to stop after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower symbol row Z3 stops (that is, after 10 seconds). After that, the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues for 50 seconds, and then the stop display is made.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (see FIG. 10) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, regardless of the variation pattern of the variation effect. The time until the first upper symbol row Z1 stops is common (9 seconds), and the time until the second lower symbol row Z3 stops is also common (10 seconds). Therefore, regardless of the variation pattern of the variation effect, the changeable period is uniform and the maximum changeable period is also uniformly 10 seconds.

  In this embodiment, when replacing the third symbols of the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, only the third symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are changing at high speed are replaced. It is configured. This is because while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the scroll rate of the third symbol is generally high and the player cannot recognize the third symbols constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (or This is because the replacement of the third symbols constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be performed without notifying the player.

  On the other hand, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at medium speed or low speed, generally, the scroll speed of the third symbol is slow, and the player can recognize the third symbols constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . Therefore, when the third symbols constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are replaced, the change is recognized by the player, and thus a variation effect unnatural for the player is executed. Further, even when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, if the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is replaced, the change is recognized by the player, which is unnatural for the player. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, by replacing only the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 that is changing at high speed, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an unnatural fluctuation effect, so the stop symbol is not felt to the player. Can be changed. Therefore, the value of the fluctuating effect can be improved, and the value of the continuous chance eye effect can be increased. Instead of the configuration in which only the third symbol in the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high-speed fluctuation is replaced, it may be configured to replace only the third symbol in the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high-speed fluctuation or medium speed fluctuation. Alternatively, only the third symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the middle speed fluctuation may be replaced.

  Further, in the above-described example, the stop symbol during the variation effect is changed to “the chance to miss”, but the symbol to be changed is not limited to this, and may be changed to any symbol. For example, if the stop symbol during the fluctuating production is accidentally set to “miss chance”, at least the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed) to make the stop symbol “complete” It can be changed to “Out of design”. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a continuous chance effect is executed, a changing effect with the stop symbol as “chance eye” is executed once or a plurality of times continuously, and then reach fluctuation is changed as a changing effect. The stop symbol indicating the lottery result that has been executed is displayed.

  Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, the player improves the expectation of an advantageous gaming state, but the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, and the “chance eye” is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable effect. ”Is accidentally selected and displayed, the player cannot improve his / her expectation for an advantageous gaming state, which not only detracts from the player's expectation but also feels unsatisfactory and dissatisfied with the player. I will let you.

  In particular, if accidental “chance eyes” are frequently displayed, the player will repeatedly feel unsatisfied and dissatisfied. As a result, the value of the continuous chance eye effect is reduced. Although details will be described later (see FIG. 35), in the present embodiment, the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, and when the “chance eye” is accidentally selected as the stop pattern of the variable effect, The stop symbol is changed to an off symbol other than “chance eyes”. Therefore, since “chance eyes” are displayed only when a continuous chance eye effect is executed, when “chance eyes” are displayed, the player indicates that the continuous chance eye effect is being executed. Can be easily recognized. Further, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to impress the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed. Therefore, since the player can improve the expectation for an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to attract the player's interest and increase the value of the continuous chance stage effect.

  In the above-described example, the change of the stop symbol when the deviation variation is executed is described. However, if the reach variation is executed, at least the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (change). By doing so, the stop symbol can be changed from “front / rear miss reach symbol” to “reach chance”. In the same manner, the stop symbol is changed from “reach opportunity other than front / rear out of reach” to “reach chance”, the stop symbol is changed from “reach chance” to “rear out of reach reach”, or the stop symbol is “reach chance”. Can be changed to “reach symbols other than back and forth”. The symbol to be changed is not limited to this, and any symbol may be changed.

  In this embodiment, the maximum changeable periods are all set to the same time (10 seconds) regardless of the variation effect pattern, but the changeable periods may be changed for each variation effect pattern. For example, for each variation effect pattern, the time from when the variation starts until the upper symbol row Z1 switches from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation, or until the lower symbol sequence Z3 switches from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation. The changeable period may be changed for each variation effect pattern by changing the time.

  In addition, as described above, the present embodiment is provided to surely execute control processing such as switching each symbol row Z1 to Z3 from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation and further switching to low speed fluctuation and stopping. There is a margin period. Therefore, depending on the contents of the control process (for example, when the control burden is small), the margin period can be shortened, and the start of the control process can be delayed accordingly. Therefore, in such a case, since the changeable period can be secured long, the maximum changeable period may be close to 10 seconds to 11 seconds. Thereby, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the chances of performing the continuous chance effect.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (for example, after 9 seconds) is the same as the timing at which the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed (for example, after 9 seconds). However, they need not be the same and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the timing at which stop display of the lower symbol row Z3 is started may be made faster than the timing at which the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the lower symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed is lower than the timing at which the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed. The timing at which the stop display of the column Z3 is started may be delayed. The same applies to the timing at which the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed (for example, after 10 seconds) and the timing at which the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (for example, after 10 seconds). There is no need to set it as desired.

  Here, returning to FIG. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / O values. Working area (working area). Further, the RAM 273 has various memories, flags, counters, and a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. Although details will be described later, when the command determination process (see FIG. 38) of the effect control device 117 is executed, the command stored first is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed by the command determination process, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 includes a special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a, a special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, a stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, a special figure A reservation ball counter 273d, and a special figure B. Holding ball counter 273e, variation time memory 273f, variation time counter 273g, variation start flag 273h, stop symbol changeable period flag 273i, stop symbol set flag 273j, stop symbol pattern table memory 273k, display And a symbol pattern memory 273l.

  The special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a is a stop to be set when the variable effect is executed individually for each variable effect executed in response to winning (entering) the first entrance A64. It is a memory for storing a set value indicating a design and a variation time when the variation effect is executed.

  In this special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a, a set value and a fluctuation time for a variable effect executed in response to winning (entry) to the first entrance A64 are stored for up to four times (holding). ) The specific configuration of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is a stop to be set when the variable effect is executed individually for each variable effect executed in response to winning (entering) the first entrance B640. It is a memory for storing a set value indicating a design and a variation time when the variation effect is executed.

  In the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, similarly to the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a, a setting for a variable effect executed in response to winning (entering) the first entrance B640 is made. Values and variation times are stored (held) up to 4 times. The specific configuration of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b will also be described later with reference to FIG.

  The stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is based on a set value and a variation time for a variation effect being executed or started, and a variation effect being executed or started based on a winning at the first entrance A64. Or start opening winning information (bit value “0” or bit value “1”) indicating whether the first winning opening B640 is based on winning.

  When a variation effect is newly executed in the third symbol display device 81, the data stored in the above-described special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b (setting value and The data about one variation effect stored in one area of the variation time) is shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. A specific configuration of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure A reserved ball counter 273d is a counter for counting the number of winnings held for the first entrance A64, that is, the special figure A reserved ball number NA, and the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e is the first input It is a counter that counts the number of times a prize is held for the ball outlet B640, that is, the special figure B number of held balls NB. Further, these special figure A and B holding ball counters 273d and 273e, like the special figure A and B holding ball counters 203d and 203e in the main controller 110, all have a maximum value of "4", and the RAM's It is initialized to “0” at the time of initial setting (see S1013 in FIG. 31).

  The special figure A and B holding ball counters 273d and 273e are updated when a winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received or when a variation effect is newly started. Is done. More specifically, when the winning information command is received, if the winning information command is based on winning in the first entrance A64, 1 is added to the special figure A holding ball counter 273d, If the winning information command is based on winning at the first entrance B640, 1 is added to the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e. When the variation effect for the first entrance A64 is newly started, the value of the special figure A holding ball counter 273d is decremented by 1, and the variation effect for the first entrance B640 is newly started. In the case of being done, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure B holding ball counter 273e. In this embodiment, when a winning information command is received, 1 is added to the special figure A and B holding ball counters 273d and 273e. When a number command is received, each value of the special figure A and B hold ball counters 273d and 273e may be set (overwritten) to each counter value indicated by the hold number command.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 16A and 16B, the special symbol A and B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b provided in the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117, and the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c are provided. Etc. will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the special symbol A and B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b and the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of figure A reservation ball counter 273d and special figure B reservation ball counter 273e.

  First, the special symbols A and B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b will be described. As described above, the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a is used when the variable effects are executed individually for each variable effect that is executed in response to winning (entering) the first entrance A64. It is a memory for storing a set value indicating a stop symbol to be set and a change time when the change effect is executed.

  In addition, the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is set when the variation effect is executed individually for each variation effect executed in response to winning (entering) the first entrance B640. This is a memory for storing a set value indicating a power stop symbol and a variation time when the variation effect is executed.

  As shown to Fig.16 (a), the special figure A stop symbol instruction | indication storage area 273a is comprised by four reservation areas (holding 1st area-holding 4th area). A set value storage area 273a1 and a variable time storage area 273a2 are provided in each of the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storing area 273a. Similarly, the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is composed of four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of the four holding areas has a set value storage area 273b1. And a variable time storage area 273b2.

  In the present embodiment, set value storage areas 273a1 and 273b1 and variable time storage areas 273a2 and 273b2 are provided in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. However, the two areas 273a1, 273a2, 273b1, and 273b2 do not necessarily have to be provided in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, and a part of each of the two areas 273a1, 273a2, 273b1, 273b2 is provided. May be provided in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, and the rest may be provided in a new storage area.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when a winning information command is received, the lottery result, the variation time, and the start opening winning information included in the winning information command are extracted. Then, based on the starting entrance winning information, whether the lottery result and the variation time are based on winning at the first entrance A64 or based on winning at the first entrance B640? If the result of the determination is based on winning at the first entrance A64, the extracted lottery result and the variation time are displayed in the four reserved areas (holding) of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a. Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area), the area is stored in the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In addition, if it is based on the winning at the first entrance B640, the extracted lottery result and the variation time are displayed in the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved first) of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storing area 273b. Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), it is stored in the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth).

  As described above, in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a, the data (setting value and fluctuation time) about the variation effect executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance A64 is stored up to four times. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). . That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  In addition, in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, data (setting value and fluctuation time) about the variation effect executed in response to winning in the first entrance B640 is stored up to four times. In this case as well, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). The That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  Next, the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c will be described. As described above, in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, the data (setting value and variation time) regarding the variation effect that is being executed or started to be executed, and the variation effect that is being executed or that is being executed are winning the first entrance A64. Is a memory that stores start opening winning information (bit value “0” or bit value “1”) indicating whether it is based on winning or winning based on the first entrance B 640. The data stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is referred to when setting the stop symbol of the variation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is composed of only one area, and includes a set value storage area 273c1, a variable time storage area 273c2, and a start opening prize information storage area 273c3. Is provided.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but when the variable effect is newly started in the third symbol display device 81, the reserved first area of the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a described above, In addition, the data (setting value and variation time) stored in one area of the reserved first area of the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is stored in each area 273c1, 273c2 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. Each is shifted.

  More specifically, when data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, the setting value storage area 273a1 of the reserved first area is set. The value is shifted to the set value storage area 273c1 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. Similarly, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation time storage area 273a2 is shifted to the fluctuation time storage area 273c2. Then, starting opening winning information (for example, bit value “0”) indicating that the data stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is based on winning in the first winning opening A64 is the starting opening winning. It is stored in the information storage area 273c3.

  On the other hand, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, the set value of the set value storage area 273b1 of the reserved first area is stopped. It is shifted to the set value storage area 273c1 of the symbol instruction execution area 273c. Similarly, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation time storage area 273b2 is shifted to the fluctuation time storage area 273c2. Then, starting opening winning information (for example, bit value “1”) indicating that the data stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is based on winning at the first winning opening B 640 is the starting opening winning. It is stored in the information storage area 273c3.

  The data shift is executed by a stop symbol instruction storage area forward process (described later with reference to FIG. 46), which is described later. Both the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b are used. When data is stored in the reserved first area, the data stored in the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is always given priority (priority) and shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. Is done.

  This is because, as described above, in the main control device 110, a lottery with a high game value advantage is preferentially performed, and is executed in accordance with winning (winning) to the first entrance A64. When the variation effect and the variation effect that is executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640 are both suspended, the variation effect that is executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640 is performed. This is because it is executed preferentially.

  The data shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is referred to in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 47), and the stop symbol of the changing effect is set based on the reference data.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data (setting value and variation time) about the variation effect executed in response to the winning at the first entrance A64, and the first entry It is distinguished from the data about the fluctuating effect executed according to the winning to the mouth B640, and stored (suspended) in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. . Therefore, when the data is shifted from the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or from the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, the shifted data becomes the first entrance A64. Start opening winning information (bit value “0” or bit value “1”) indicating whether the winning is based on winning or winning based on the first entrance B 640 is stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. be able to.

  Therefore, when the process for determining whether to start the continuous chance eye effect (continuous effect start determination process (see FIG. 40)) is executed, the variation effect to be executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640. Based on the number of holds, it can be determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect can be started.

  When the data shift to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is completed, the reserved first area of the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the reserved first area of the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b Since one area becomes empty, each of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is executed by the stop symbol instruction storage area forward process (see FIG. 46) described later. Shift processing is performed in which data stored (held) in the reserved area (second to fourth) is packed into the reserved area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In this embodiment, in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, the reserved area (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Only shift data.

  Here, the data shift in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 273d is “4” and data is stored in all the reserved areas (first to fourth) of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a. In this state, the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the data of the other reserved areas (second to fourth) are respectively area numbers. Shift to one smaller reserved area (first to third).

  That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. . Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, if the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 273d is “2”, only the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area. The data shift ends. Note that the data shift in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is performed in the same manner as the data shift in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden. In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to a reservation area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 272 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of data stored in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b (the number of reservations) is expressed as the special figure A hold ball counter 273d. And the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e. Then, when a winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, if the winning information command is based on winning in the first entrance A64, a setting value corresponding to the winning information command And the variable time in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a according to the value (the special figure A reserved ball number NA) indicated by the special figure A reserved ball counter 273d (holding first area to holding number 1). 4 areas). On the other hand, if the winning information command is based on winning at the first entrance B640, the set value and the variation time corresponding to the winning information command are set in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. It is stored in a holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) according to a value (special figure B holding ball number NB) indicated by the special figure B holding ball counter 273e.

  Therefore, in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, the data (setting value and fluctuation time) about the variation effect executed in response to a new winning is stored in the holding area. Since the data stored (suspended) is not overwritten, after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area, the data in the shift source area is not cleared and remains as it is. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden as compared with the case of clearing the data of the shift source area after the data shift. Note that the data in the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when data is stored in both the first reserved area of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the first reserved area of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. Is preferentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c with priority (always giving priority). You may comprise so that data may be shifted to the stop symbol instruction | indication execution area 273c in order from an early data.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the data (setting value and variation time) about the variation effect executed in response to the winning at the first entrance A64, B640, the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a, The special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is divided into two areas and stored, but may be stored together in one area (for example, a stop symbol instruction storage area is provided). In this case, eight stop areas are provided in the stop symbol instruction storage area, and in addition to the set value storage area and the variable time storage area described above, each start area further includes a start opening prize information storage area. Is provided.

  And when the data (setting value and fluctuation time) about the variation production performed according to the winning at the first entrance A64 are stored in one reserved area, the starting entrance prize information of the reserved area is stored. In the area, start opening winning information (for example, a bit value “0”) indicating that the data is based on winning in the first winning opening A64 is stored. On the other hand, when the data about the variation effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640 is stored, the data is stored in the start entrance winning information storage area of the reserved area to the first entrance B640. The start opening winning information (for example, bit value “1”) indicating that it is based on the winning is stored.

  Thereby, the data about the variation effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance A64 and the data about the variation effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640 are distinguished, Both can be stored (suspended) in the stop symbol instruction storage area. In addition, when shifting the data memorize | stored in each holding area in a stop symbol instruction | indication storage area to a stop symbol instruction | indication execution area, the data in each storage area of one reservation area are stopped. Shift to each corresponding storage area.

  Moreover, when comprised in this way, it is data in an order from the area with a small area number (1st-8th) in the vacant area of 8 reservation areas (hold 1st area-hold 8th area). Each time new data is stored in the holding area, the data stored in each holding area is rearranged. For example, if the newly stored data is based on winning at the first entrance B640, the data is repeatedly shifted to an area with a smaller area number. If data based on winning in the first entrance B640 is stored in an area with a smaller area number, the shift ends. As a result, when storing data based on winning at the first entrance A64 and data based on winning at the first entrance B640, the smaller the area number, the first entrance It is possible to store data that is based on winning in the mouth B640 and that corresponds to winnings that are older in time.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 17A to 17C, the setting values stored in the special symbols A and B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b and the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c will be described. In the present embodiment, since the variation effect executed according to the winning to the first entrance B640 is preferentially executed, here, the preferential execution is performed. The special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b in which data (setting value and fluctuation time) regarding the fluctuation effect is stored will be described. Note that the description of the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a is the same as the description of the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, and therefore will be omitted.

  FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. FIG. 17B is a setting mainly stored in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. It is the schematic which shows an example of the relationship between a value and a stop symbol, and FIG.17 (c) is set according to the winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main controller 110, and the command. It is the schematic which shows an example with a setting value.

  As described above, the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is composed of four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth), and each holding area includes a set value storage area 273b1 and a variable time. A storage area 273b2 is provided.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, “first chance” is stored as a set value in the reserved first area of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. Hereinafter, in order to clarify that it is a set value, when the set value is indicated, “set value:” is described before each set value. For example, when the set value is “chance”, “set value: chance” is described. Furthermore, “10 seconds” is stored as the variation time in the reserved first area. Note that, as described above, the variation effect pattern in which the variation time is “10 seconds” corresponds to outlier variation.

  Similarly, “setting value: chance chance” and “11.5 seconds” are stored in the holding second area, and “setting value: probability variation big hit” and “60 seconds” are stored in the holding third area. Nothing is stored in the reserved fourth area. As described above, the variation effect pattern with a variation time of “11.5 seconds” corresponds to an outlier variation, and the variation effect pattern with a variation time of “60 seconds” includes a special reach variation. Applicable.

  Next, the relationship between the set value stored in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b and the stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is executed will be described. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the set value mainly stored in the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b and the stop symbol. As shown in FIG. 17B, in this embodiment, four types of setting values are provided. Specifically, “setting value: out of”, “setting value: chance chance”, “setting value: probability variation big hit”, “setting value: normal big hit” are provided as setting values.

  As described above, when the variation effect is newly executed, the data (setting value and variation time) stored in the reserved first area is shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. Then, based on the set value that has been shifted, the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. For example, when the set value that has been shifted is “setting value: out”, when a variation effect is newly executed, “completely out symbol”, Any one of the “rear and front missed reach symbols” and the stop symbols that become “reach symbols other than front and rear missed” is displayed. The “completely missed symbol” includes the above-mentioned “missing chance eye”, and the “rearly missed reach symbol” and the “reach symbol other than front and back missed” include the above-mentioned “reach chance symbol”. "It is included.

  Also, if the set value that has been shifted is “set value: chance chance”, any of the stop symbols that become “off chance chance” and “reach chance eye” when a variable effect is newly executed. Is displayed. In addition, when the set value that has been shifted is “set value: probability variation jackpot”, when a variation effect is newly executed, a stop symbol that becomes “probability variation jackpot symbol” is displayed and the set value that has been shifted. When “set value: normal jackpot” is selected, a stop symbol that becomes “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed when a new variation effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the continuous chance eye effect is executed, only the reserved portion of the variable effect that is executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640 is used except for the changing effect being executed. Then, the direct chance eyes are performed. In addition, data (setting value and variation time) about the variation effect being executed is stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c.

  Therefore, “setting value: chance” is stored only in the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b or the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, and the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a is stored. Any one of the three setting values of “setting value: off”, “setting value: probable big hit”, and “setting value: normal big hit” is stored.

  Next, the timing at which new set values are stored in the special figure A and B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b will be described. FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main controller 110 and a set value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command.

  As described above, when the prize control command (such as a lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the effect control device 117 receives the set value and variation time corresponding to the received prize information command. It is newly stored in the figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. In this case, set values are stored in order of increasing area number among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17C, if the lottery result included in the received winning information command is “miss”, “setting value: missing” is set as the setting value corresponding to the winning information command. , B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b. Similarly, if the lottery result included in the received winning information command is “probable jackpot”, “setting value: probable jackpot” is included in the received winning information command as a setting value corresponding to the winning information command. If the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, “set value: normal jackpot” is stored in the special figure A and B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b as the set value corresponding to the winning information command.

  Although details will be described later, the set value corresponding to the received winning information command (lottery result), the changing time, and the starting opening winning information are stored in the special symbols A and B stop symbol instruction storage areas 273a and 273b. Then, the contents of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b are updated according to the set value and the content of the variation time stored in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b (FIGS. 41 and 43). , See FIG. 44). When this update is performed, for example, “set value: out” stored in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is changed to “set value: chance”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The variation time memory 273f is a memory in which the variation time of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. When the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received, the variation time is stored in the variation time memory 273f (see S1604 in FIG. 38).

  The variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation pattern of variation production to be executed (out-of-range variation, out-of-range long variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, special reach variation, etc.). Is a command indicating the pattern of the notice effect of the change effect to be executed. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time is determined for each variation pattern of the variation effect, and the extension time and the reduction time are determined for each pattern of the notice effect. Therefore, the variation time memory 273f stores the total time of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the extension time (shortening time) corresponding to the effect time addition command.

  The variation time counter 273g is a counter that stores an elapsed time after the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The variation start flag 273h is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 273h is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command and an effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received (see S1604 in FIG. 38), and the third symbol display device When the variable effect is started in 81, it is set to OFF (see S1305 in FIG. 34).

  Whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is within a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). This flag is set to ON only when the execution of a variation effect in which the lottery result is out (see S2107 and S2108 in FIG. 45), and the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed. Is set to OFF (see S1112 in FIG. 32). Note that the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is not turned on when the deviating long fluctuation is executed. This is because a predetermined stop symbol (“chance eye”) is always displayed in the outlier long fluctuation, and the stop symbol is not changed in the first place.

  While the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is ON, the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is off, it is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed. Specifically, when the stop symbol has already been changed or the changeable period is set. This is the case when it is exceeded, or when the variation effect is not executed.

  The stop symbol set flag 273j is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variable effect that has been started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 has been set. The stop symbol set flag 273j is set to ON when the stop symbol setting is completed. When the stop symbol set flag 273j is off, it indicates that the stop symbol has not been set yet.

  The stop symbol pattern table memory 273k is a memory for storing a stop symbol pattern table. The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing in advance a third symbol array (a symbol combination) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern for each stop symbol pattern. In this table, only the information indicating the “third symbol arrangement” (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol arrangement information”) of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stored. Yes, image data or the like is not stored.

  In the present embodiment, when a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern to be displayed is It is acquired from the stop symbol pattern table. Then, in order to construct a stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information, image data of the third symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is acquired. Thereafter, according to the arrangement of the third symbol indicated by the third symbol arrangement information, the image of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the stop symbol is displayed.

  Here, the stop symbol pattern table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the stop symbol pattern table, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the stop symbol pattern table that is being updated.

  The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing, in advance, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern for each stop symbol pattern. As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the stop symbol pattern table includes a probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, a front / rear reach area, a reach area other than front / rear miss, a complete miss area, and a symbol pattern generation area. Is provided.

  The probability variation jackpot area is an area for storing the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “probability variation jackpot symbol”. Similarly, the normal jackpot area corresponds to the “normal jackpot symbol”, the front / rear reach area corresponds to the “front / rear reach symbol”, the reach area other than the front / rear portion corresponds to the “reach symbol other than the front / rear out”, complete The detachment area is an area for storing each third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “completely detachable symbol”. Although the details will be described later, the symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating the stop symbol pattern table.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. However, when a stop symbol is set based on the stop symbol command, a stop symbol pattern is extracted from the stop symbol command, and the area corresponding to the pattern is extracted. The stored third symbol arrangement information is acquired. As described above, in the present embodiment, “probable big hit symbol”, “normal jackpot symbol”, “front / rear miss reach symbol”, “reach symbol other than front / rear miss”, and “completely miss symbol” are provided as stop symbol patterns. It has been. The “completely missed pattern” includes “miss chance eyes”, and the “rear and miss-reach patterns” and “reach patterns other than front and back misses” include “reach chance eyes”. ing. For example, if the stop symbol pattern extracted from the stop symbol command is “probability variation jackpot symbol”, the third symbol array information stored in the probability variation jackpot area is acquired. Then, a stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The stop symbol pattern table is configured to be updated periodically (for example, every 5 ms), and the value of each area (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) is acquired. Therefore, an irregular value will be obtained. Therefore, since the arrangement of the 3rd symbol (stop symbol) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be various, it is possible to avoid the player from having a monotonous impression on the game, and to have high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has.

  Each area described above is provided with a first area, a second area, and a third area. In the first area, three symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are provided. Among the (upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, lower symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 10)), information indicating each symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is stored. Similarly, in the second area, the middle symbol row is stored. Information indicating each symbol of Z2 is stored, and information indicating each symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stored in the third area.

  Specifically, in the first area, there is a virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, and at the left end of the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored. Similarly, in the second area, there is an array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, and the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2. Remembered. In the third area, the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3, which is stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3, is stored. The

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, “6” is stored in the first area of the probability variation jackpot area, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. And Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, when the array number is “6”, the upper symbol row Z1 is sequentially changed from “left” to “right”. 7) "," shellfish ", and" Ankou (6) ". Similarly, when the array number of the second area is “12”, the middle symbol row Z2 is arranged in the order of “shell”, “dugong (7)”, “shell” in order from left to right. When the array number of the third area is “11”, the lower symbol row Z3 is “Ancho (6)”, “Shell”, “Dugong (7)” in order from left to right. It shows that it is a symbol row lined with.

  When these symbol sequences are combined, “Dugong (7)” is arranged on the left-up line L5 (see FIG. 10), so that it becomes a stop symbol indicating a probable big hit symbol. Therefore, when a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on each array number of the probability variation jackpot area, the probability variation jackpot symbol is displayed. Note that the same explanation applies to the normal jackpot area, the front / rear reach area, the reach area other than the front / rear disengagement, and the complete miss area, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one array number indicating each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is stored in each of the first to third areas. Therefore, the array numbers of the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are stored, respectively, and the arrangement order of the third symbols in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 (left, middle, right The amount of information stored in the RAM 273 can be reduced rather than storing the order of the three symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, the array number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. Although stored, the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Moreover, the array numbers of any two third symbols may be stored among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, or each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is constituted. You may memorize | store the sequence number of three 3rd symbols, respectively.

  Next, the symbol pattern generation area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating each area (probability jackpot area, normal jackpot area, etc.) in the stop symbol pattern table. In each of the first to third areas, the value is like a counter. Will be updated.

  Specifically, 1 is added to the third area periodically (for example, every 5 ms), and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value (that is, 18), the third area is cleared to 1. , 1 is added to the second area. When the value of the second area reaches the maximum value (that is, 20), the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value (that is, 18), the first area is simply cleared to 1.

  Each time the value of the symbol pattern generation area is updated, the updated value (array number) of each of the first to third areas is changed to which area (for example, probability change) in the stopped symbol pattern table. It is determined whether it corresponds to a jackpot area or a normal jackpot area), and the updated value (array number) of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the determined area. That is, a new 3rd symbol array (combination of symbols) is generated in the symbol pattern generation area, and then the generated 3rd symbol array is an area corresponding to the 3rd symbol array (for example, probability variation big hit Area (usually a big hit area).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18B, “15” is stored in the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, “1” is stored in the second area, and “18” is stored in the third area. Suppose that Here, at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, 1 is added to the third area. In this case, since the value of the third area exceeds the maximum value (18), the third area is cleared to 1. At the same time, 1 is added to the second area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is updated to a state where the first area is “15”, the second area is “2”, and the third area is “1”.

  When the first area is “15”, it indicates that the upper symbol row Z1 is a symbol row lined with “shell”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shell” in order from left to right. Similarly, when the second area is “2”, the middle symbol row Z2 is aligned with “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shellfish”, and when the third area is “1”, It is shown that the column Z3 is a symbol row along with “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, and “harisenbon (3)”.

  When these symbol sequences are combined, since “Harisenbon (2)” exists in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3, it becomes a stop symbol that indicates a chance to miss. As described above, since the “off chance chance” is included in the “completely missed symbol”, the updated value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the completely missed area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Then, once again at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, 1 is added to the third area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is “15” for the first area, “2” for the second area, The three areas are updated to the state “2”. Therefore, in this case, only the arrangement of the lower symbol row Z3 is updated.

  When the third area is “2”, the lower symbol row Z3 indicates a symbol row alongside “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shellfish”. Since “Harisenbon (2)” is arranged in L2, it becomes a stop symbol indicating a normal jackpot symbol. Therefore, the updated value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Similarly, the update of the stop symbol pattern table is repeated every time the symbol pattern generation area is updated. As a result of updating the symbol pattern generation area, if the probability variation jackpot symbol, the front / rear outreach symbol, or the stop symbol indicating a reach symbol other than front / rear out is generated, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area is These are stored in the probability variation jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table, the front / rear reach area, and the reach area other than the front / rear miss. As described above, the “reach chance” is included in the “front / rear out of reach design” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The display symbol pattern memory 273l is a memory for storing the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) of the stop symbols actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display symbol pattern memory 273l will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273l, and FIG. 19B shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273l. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example.

  The display symbol pattern memory 273l is a memory for storing the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) of the stop symbols that are actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, a first area, a second area, and a third area are provided.

  That is, in the first area, the virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol is stored. Similarly, in the second area, there is an array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, and the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2. Remembered. In the third area, the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3, which is stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3, is stored. The

  For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, “6” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273l, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. In this state, it is assumed that a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is in order from left to right. , “Dugong (7)”, “Shell”, “Ankou (6)” are displayed.

  Similarly, since the array number of the second area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2, it is arranged in order of "shellfish", "Dugong (7)", and "shellfish" from left to right. A symbol row is displayed, and the sequence number of the third area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, in order from the left to the right, “Ankou (6)”, “Shell”, “Dugong ( 7) "is displayed. As described above, the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. The same description applies to cases where other array numbers are stored in the first to third areas, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one array number indicating each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is stored in each of the first to third areas. Therefore, the array numbers of the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are stored in the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement order of the third symbols in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. The amount of information stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, the array number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. Although stored, the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Moreover, the array numbers of any two third symbols may be stored among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, or each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is constituted. You may memorize | store the sequence number of three 3rd symbols, respectively.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 276 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory that stores data for presentation such as symbols (background symbols, third symbols, and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The character ROM 275 stores, for example, various data for effects used for variable effects, the character pattern of the third symbol, the background symbol, the notice character symbol, and the like. The various types of data for production correspond to data used for variation production of out-of-range variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, and special reach variation (hereinafter referred to as “variable representation data”).

  The character ROM 275 stores the above-mentioned effect data in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary presentation data compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read out and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 276 is provided with a variable effect data storage area 276a and a stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  The variation effect data storage area 276a is a memory for storing variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol data storage region 276b is a third symbol display device. A memory for storing image data of a third symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop symbol data”) for constituting a stop symbol to be displayed at 81.

  In the present embodiment, one variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the variation effect data and the stop symbol data. As will be described in detail later, when the variation effect is started, first, an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. A stop symbol (stop symbol data) is displayed every time (see S1310 and S1311 in FIG. 34).

  When the effect control device 117 receives the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 reads out the variation effect data of the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the received command from the character ROM 275. Then, it is stored in this variable effect data storage area 276a (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, when a stop symbol command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, stop symbol data of a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the received command is read from character ROM 275 and stored in this stop symbol data storage area 276b. (Refer to S2306 and S2307 in FIG. 47).

  The reason why various data are read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable effect data storage area 276a and the stop symbol data storage area 276b is because the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is read from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display is not possible or clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 112, 117 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and drives various switches 208, solenoids such as a solenoid 209, motors and the like, a voltage of 12 volts, and 5 for logic. A volt voltage, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and among these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage, the voltages required by the control devices 110 to 112, 117, etc. are supplied to each. .

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28). Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data in the RAM 203 and issues a payout initialization command for causing the payout controller 111 to clear the backup data. It transmits to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 28. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (see FIG. 20) that is activated when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 21) that is executed after the startup process, and a regular process (this embodiment). In the form, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) activated at a cycle of 2 ms) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a process that is repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 at a cycle of 2 ms, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, various switch reading processes are executed (S501). Here, for example, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 are read, and various winning ports (general winning port 63, specific winning port 65a, first winning port A64, first winning port B640). In the RAM 203, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize opening is displayed in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Set (memorize).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (2309 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the first initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203f of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 The updated value is stored in a second initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203f of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the second per-random number counter C3 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the second per-random number counter C3, and the counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, 2309, respectively). , 19, 250), each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters C1 to C3 provided in the work area 203f of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a first start winning process is performed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance A64 (S504), and then a second starting winning process is performed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640 (S505). Then, the firing control process is executed (S506), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The first start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, and the second starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the firing control process is performed on the condition that a touch switch (not shown) for detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 is detected and a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of the sphere. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the first start winning process (S504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first start winning process (S504). The first start winning process (S504) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the special figure A holding ball storage area 203a when the winning to the first winning slot A64 is detected. This is a process executed in the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  In the first start winning process (S504), first, the state (on or off) of the first entrance A switch 208a is read to determine whether or not the ball has won (entered) the first entrance A64. It is determined (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that the state of the first entrance A switch 208a is off and there is no winning at the first entrance A64 (S601: No), nothing is done. The first start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  On the other hand, when the state of the first entrance A switch 208a is on and it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first entrance A64 (S601: Yes), the special figure A is on hold. It is determined whether or not the value of the ball counter 203d (the special figure A reserved ball number NA) is less than a predetermined upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S602).

  In the process of S602, when the value of the special figure A reserved sphere counter 203d (special figure A reserved sphere number NA) is 4, that is, when the upper limit has already been reached (S602: No), S603 Each process of S613 is skipped, this 1st start winning process (S504) is complete | finished, and it returns to a timer interruption process (refer FIG. 25). On the other hand, if the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (number of special figure A reserved balls NA) is less than 4 in the process of S602 (S602: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d ( S603).

  Next, each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 updated by the processing of S503 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) and the main processing (see FIG. 21) described later are updated. The values of the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the third variation type counter CS3 are stored in the free reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. The area is stored in each of the storage areas 203a1 to 203a5 in the area corresponding to the special figure A reserved ball number NA (S604).

  For example, when the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA) updated by the processing of S603 is “1”, each storage area 203a1 to 203a5 of the reserved first area has The respective values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3 are stored. That is, if the special figure A reserved ball number NA is “X (X = 1 to 4)”, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a5 of the reserved X area. Remember each one.

  Next, a new winning lottery result is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 and C2 stored in the processing of S604 and the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203g (S605). More specifically, if the prefetching high probability state flag 203g is on, it is determined that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and the stored values of the counters C1 and C2 are analyzed, and the prefetching high probability state flag 203g is off. Then, assuming that the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the stored values of the counters C1 and C2 are analyzed. Then, as a result of the lottery, whether it is “big hit” or “off”, and in the case of big hit, “first probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit)”, “second probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit)”, or “ It is acquired (prefetching) whether it is “a normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot)”.

  Based on the acquired lottery result and the values of the counters CS1 to CS3, the fluctuation time is acquired (S606). Next, a winning information command including the acquired lottery result, the acquired variation time, and the start opening winning information (bit value “0”) is output to the effect control device 117 (S607). As described above, the start opening winning information is based on whether the data is based on winning in the first winning slot A64 (bit value “0”) or based on winning in the first winning slot B640 ( For example, it is information indicating whether the bit value is “1”).

  Normally, various commands are transmitted to the production control device 117 by an external output process (see S201 in FIG. 21) of the main process executed every 4 ms, but here, without waiting for the execution of the external output process. Immediately, the winning information command is output to the effect control device 117. Since the main process is executed every 4 ms, if a winning information command is transmitted immediately, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 at a maximum of about 4 ms earlier.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main process. In addition, since the prize control device 117 can receive the winning information command and other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings. The control burden can be distributed. In addition, the main control device 110 can separately transmit the incoming ball information command and other commands to the effect control means 117, so that it is possible to disperse the control burden as compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. .

  In this embodiment, the winning information command is output immediately. However, here, only the setting of the winning information command is performed, and the winning information command is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process at the execution timing of the next main process. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in this embodiment, by transmitting one winning information command, the acquired lottery result, the acquired variation time, and the starting opening winning information (for example, bit value “0”) are transmitted at a time. However, the lottery result, the variation time, and the start opening prize information may not be sent all at once, but may be divided into a plurality of commands and sent.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S605 is a big hit (S608), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S608: Yes), it is determined whether the big win is a promising big hit (S609). . On the other hand, when the lottery result is out (S608: No), the process of S609 to S611 is skipped and the process proceeds to S612.

  In the process of S609, if the big hit is a probable big hit (S609: Yes), the prefetch high probability state flag 203g is set to ON (S610). On the other hand, if the big hit is the normal big hit (S609: No), the prefetch high probability state flag 203g is set to OFF (S611). Thus, even if the lottery result is not acquired after waiting for the start of the fluctuating effect corresponding to the new winning, when the new winning data is acquired, the lottery result is displayed in the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203g. Analysis (prefetching) based on In addition, as soon as the newly held winning data is acquired, the lottery result corresponding to the winning can be accurately acquired, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result can be transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  Next, a hold number command is set (S612). Here, a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA) and the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is set. . The hold number command set here is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 21). When the output hold number command is received by the production control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure A hold ball number NA indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure A hold lamp 85A. The same number of lamps as the special figure B reserved ball number NB indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure B hold lamp 85B.

  Next, the LED 37Aa in the first symbol display device 37A is turned on according to the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A held ball number NA), and the new number of times of holding is indicated by the lighting state (S613). When the process of S613 is completed, the first start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  According to the first start winning process (S504) of FIG. 26 described above, when a winning to the first entrance A64 is detected by the first entrance A switch 208a, data corresponding to the winning ( Each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3) is stored in the area with the smallest area number among the empty reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special figure A holding ball storage area 203a. be able to. Therefore, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the older winnings can be stored, so that the temporal winning order (winning order) is given. Data can be stored.

  Further, the lottery result and the variation time of the data (each value of each counter C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3) corresponding to the winning at the first entrance A64 are pre-read, the lottery result, the variation time, and the start The winning information command including the mouth winning information can be immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 21) of the main processing. By immediately outputting (transmitting) the winning information command, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 earlier by about 4 ms at maximum. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Each time the lottery result of data corresponding to a new winning is prefetched (acquired), the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203g can be updated based on the lottery result. Therefore, even if the lottery result is not acquired by waiting until the start of the variable effect corresponding to the new winning, when the new winning data is acquired, the lottery result is displayed in the state of the pre-reading high probability state flag 203g. Analysis (prefetching) based on In addition, as soon as the newly held winning data is acquired, the lottery result corresponding to the winning can be accurately acquired, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result can be transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  Next, the second start winning process (S505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second start winning process (S505). The second start winning process (S505) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the special figure B holding ball storage area 203b when the winning to the first winning hole B640 is detected. This is a process executed in the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  In the second start winning process (S505), first, the state (on or off) of the first entrance B switch 208b is read to determine whether or not the ball has won (entered) the first entrance B640. A determination is made (S631). In the process of S631, when it is determined that the state of the first entrance B switch 208b is off and there is no winning at the first entrance B640 (S631: No), nothing is done. The second start winning process (S505) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  On the other hand, if the state of the first entrance B switch 208b is ON and it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first entrance B640 (S631: Yes), the special figure B is on hold. It is determined whether or not the value of the ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is less than a predetermined upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S632).

  In the process of S632, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 4, that is, when the upper limit has already been reached (S632: No), S633 Each process of S643 is skipped, this 2nd start winning process (S505) is complete | finished, and it returns to a timer interruption process (refer FIG. 25). On the other hand, in the process of S632, if the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is less than 4 (S632: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e ( S633).

  Next, each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 updated by the processing of S503 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) and the main processing (see FIG. 21) described later are updated. The respective values of the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the third variation type counter CS3 are stored in the free reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth value) of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The area is stored in each of the storage areas 203b1 to 203b5 in the area corresponding to the special figure B reserved ball number NB (S634).

  For example, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (the special figure B reserved ball number NB) updated by the process of S633 is “1”, each storage area 203b1 to 203b5 of the reserved first area includes The respective values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3 are stored. That is, if the special figure B reserved ball number NB is “X (X = 1 to 4)”, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3 are stored in the storage areas 203b1 to 203b5 of the reserved X area. Remember each one.

  Next, a new winning lottery result is acquired based on the stored values of the counters C1 and C2 and the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203g (S635). More specifically, if the prefetching high probability state flag 203g is on, it is determined that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and the stored values of the counters C1 and C2 are analyzed, and the prefetching high probability state flag 203g is off. Then, assuming that the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the stored values of the counters C1 and C2 are analyzed. Then, as a result of the lottery, whether it is “big hit” or “off”, and in the case of big hit, “first probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit)”, “second probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit)”, or “ It is acquired (prefetching) whether it is “a normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot)”.

  Then, based on the acquired lottery result and each value of the counters CS1 to CS3, the fluctuation time is acquired (S636). Next, a winning information command including the acquired lottery result, the acquired variation time, and the start opening winning information (for example, bit value “1”) is output to the effect control device 117 (S637). As described above, the start opening winning information is based on whether the data is based on winning in the first winning slot A64 (for example, the bit value “0”) or based on winning in the first winning slot B640. It is information indicating whether it is a thing (for example, bit value “1”).

  Here, the winning information command is immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 21) of the main process. Since the main process is executed every 4 ms, if a winning information command is transmitted immediately, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 at a maximum of about 4 ms earlier.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main process. In addition, since the prize control device 117 can receive the winning information command and other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings. The control burden can be distributed. In addition, the main control device 110 can separately transmit the incoming ball information command and other commands to the effect control means 117, so that it is possible to disperse the control burden as compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S635 is a jackpot (S638). If the lottery result is a jackpot (S638: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a promiscuous jackpot (S639). . On the other hand, when the lottery result is out (S638: No), the process of S639 to S641 is skipped and the process proceeds to S642.

  In the process of S639, if the big hit is a probable big hit (S639: Yes), the prefetch high probability state flag 203g is set to ON (S640). On the other hand, if the big hit is the normal big hit (S639: No), the prefetch high probability state flag 203g is set to OFF (S641).

  Next, a hold number command is set (S642). Here, a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA) and the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is set. . The hold number command set here is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 21). When the output hold number command is received by the production control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure A hold ball number NA indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure A hold lamp 85A. The same number of lamps as the special figure B reserved ball number NB indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure B hold lamp 85B.

  Next, the LED 37Ba in the first symbol display device 37B is turned on according to the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB), and the new number of holdings is indicated by the lighting state (S643). When the process of S643 is completed, the second start winning process (S505) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  According to the second start winning process (S505) of FIG. 27 described above, when a winning to the first entrance B 640 is detected by the first entrance B switch 208b, data corresponding to the winning ( Each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3) is stored in an area having the smallest area number among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. be able to. Therefore, in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the older winnings can be stored, so that the temporal winning order (winning order) is given. Data can be stored.

  In addition, the lottery result and the variation time of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3) corresponding to the winning at the first entrance B640 are pre-read, the lottery result, the variation time, and the start port A winning information command including winning information can be immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for an external output process (see S201 in FIG. 21) of the main process. By immediately outputting (transmitting) the winning information command, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 earlier by about 4 ms at maximum. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Each time the lottery result of data corresponding to a new winning is prefetched (acquired), the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203g can be updated based on the lottery result. Therefore, even if the lottery result is not acquired by waiting until the start of the variable effect corresponding to the new winning, when the new winning data is acquired, the lottery result is displayed in the state of the pre-reading high probability state flag 203g. Analysis (prefetching) based on

  Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing of main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process includes a process executed in the main controller 110 and a process executed in the payout controller 111. Here, only the NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 will be described.

  In this NMI interrupt process, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the main controller 110. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the main controller 110, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or the MPU 201 is reset.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and a wait process (in order to wait for the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) to become operable) 1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in S213 of the main process (see FIG. 21). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 in order to initialize the payout control device 111 (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. On the other hand, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203 after transmission of the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main controller 110. The main process is a process for executing the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 20) of the main controller 110 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 ms. It is processing. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In this main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to a sub-control device (payout control device 111, effect control device 117, etc.) (S201). For example, when a prize ball command is set by the process of S501 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Further, for example, by a hold number command set by the first start winning process (see FIG. 26) or the second start winning process (see FIG. 27) described above, or a holding ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 23) described later. Set hold number command, change pattern command (necessary for the third symbol display by the third symbol display device 81), stop symbol command, stop command set by the change start process (see FIG. 24) described later Various commands such as an effect time addition command are transmitted to the effect control device 117. Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  The transmission of output data such as commands is performed in the order in which the output data such as commands are set. Then, when the production control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the 3rd symbol display by the 3rd symbol display device 81), A variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 and a stop symbol displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 are set.

  Next, each value of the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the third variation type counter CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and the counter values are cleared to 0 when they reach the maximum values (99, 99, 162 in the present embodiment). Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203f of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process (S204), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed ( S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds).

  Next, a display control process for the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) in the second symbol display unit 83 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the value of the second per-random number counter C3 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display unit 83 In FIG. 2, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the winning determination in the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C3, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance B640 is released for a predetermined time, Becomes easy to enter the first entrance B640.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes of S201 to S208 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (2309, 250 in this embodiment), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CINI1 and CINI2 provided in the work area 203f of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and the counter values are cleared to 0 when they reach the maximum values (99, 99, 162 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203f of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 mentioned above changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and changes. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C3) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to the sub-control devices (payout control device 111, effect control device 117, etc.) (S212). . Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power supply interruption state, It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process when the power is shut down, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area, and the initial setting of the startup process (see FIG. 20) can be performed without saving the stack pointer value. In the process (S101), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the fluctuation process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation process (S204) of main controller 110. In the variation process (S204), when data corresponding to a winning is stored (held) in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b, the fluctuation corresponding to the data is stored. This is a process for starting display, and is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  In this variation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). As the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B in the case of the jackpot (that is, "first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)", " The second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) and “ordinary jackpot (15R regular jackpot)”) and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends are included. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this fluctuation process (S204) is terminated without performing anything, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is changing (S302), and the first symbol display device 37A and the first symbol display device 37A 1 If the display mode of the symbol display device 37B is not changing (S302: No), the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (number of special figure A held balls NA) and the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e ( Special figure B reserve ball number NB) is acquired (S303).

  Then, the value of the special figure A reserved sphere counter 203d (special figure A reserved sphere number NA) and the value of the special figure B reserved sphere counter 203e (special figure B reserved sphere number NB) are added to obtain the total number of retained balls. N is calculated (S304). Next, it is determined whether or not the total number of retained balls N is greater than 0 (S305). If the total number of retained balls N is 0 (S305: No) as a result of confirmation by the processing of S305, S306, S307. This process is skipped, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, if the total number N of reserved balls is 1 or more (S305: Yes), the data used for the determination of the jackpot is stored from the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area forward process for shifting to the execution area 203c is executed (S306), and the change start process for starting the change display of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is executed (S307). Then, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

  The reserved ball storage area progressive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, and the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, since this fluctuation process (S204) is a subroutine executed in the main process, it is executed every 4 ms. However, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), or if it is fluctuating (S302: Yes). Since the processes of S306 and S307 are skipped, the variable display is not started each time the variable process is executed, and the data corresponding to the pending winning is not consumed.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has passed (S308). ). The display time during the change of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the change time selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If the time has not passed (S308: No), this variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, in both the first symbol display device 37A and the first symbol display device 37B, the variation time from the start of the variation of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba is, for example, the current If the lit LED is red, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the yellow LED. If the yellow LED is turned on, the yellow LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on. A display mode is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S308, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B has elapsed (S308: Yes), the display corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B A mode is set (S309). Whether the stop symbol is set or not is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 indicates “first probability variation big win (15R The symbol that is “probable big jackpot”, the symbol that becomes “second probability big jackpot (2R probability big jackpot)”, or the symbol that is “normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot)” is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)” is reached, and the green LED is displayed when “second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)” is identified. Is turned on, the yellow LED is turned on when it becomes “normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot)”, and the blue LED is turned on when it is off. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S309, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37A. A stop command is set to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the symbol display device 37B (S310). When receiving the stop command, the effect control device 117 ends the variable display being executed on the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, in the 3rd symbol display device 81, when the variation time elapses, the screen display is kept unchanged, and when the stop command is received, 1 variation in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is received. The production ends. When the process of S310 is completed, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the reserved ball storage area forward process (S306) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S306) of main controller 110. The reserved ball storage area forward process (S306) is a process for shifting the data used for the jackpot determination from the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b to the reserved ball execution area 203c. This is a process executed in the variation process (see FIG. 22). This process is executed when the total number of reserved balls N (addition of the special figure A reserved ball number NA and the special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 1 or more.

  In this reserved ball storage area forward feed process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is larger than 0 (S351). In the process of S351, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 0 (S351: No), data corresponding to winning only in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a Is stored (held), the data stored in the reserved first area of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c (S356).

  Specifically, the data stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. Similarly, data stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 is transferred to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and data stored in the first change type counter storage area 203a3 is changed to the first change type counter storage area 203a2. The data stored in the second variation type counter storage area 203a4 is stored in the storage area 203c3, and the data stored in the third variation type counter storage area 203a4 is stored in the third variation type counter storage area 203a4. The type counter storage area 203c5 is shifted to.

  Then, the bit value “0” that is the start opening winning information is stored in the starting opening winning information storage area 203c6 of the holding ball execution area 203c (S357). As described above, if the data stored in the holding ball execution area 203c is based on winning in the first entrance A64, the bit value “0” is stored in the start entrance winning information storage area 203c6, and the first If it is based on winning at the entrance B640, the bit value “1” is stored in the start entrance winning information storage area 203c6. Here, since the data corresponding to winning in the first entrance A64 is stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, the bit value “0” is stored in the starting entrance winning information storage area 203c6.

  Next, the respective data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the areas having the smaller area numbers (first to third areas), respectively (S358). ). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA) (S359), and the process proceeds to S360.

  In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden is reduced. be able to. Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a holding | maintenance area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  In the process of S351, if the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 1 or more (S351: Yes), it is stored in the reserved first area of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b. Each data that has been set is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c (S352).

  In the present embodiment, the probability of the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) at the time of the jackpot is “7/20” when winning the first entrance A64, and the first entrance B640 is won. In this case, “3/5” is obtained. In addition, the probability of becoming the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) at the time of the big hit becomes “3/10” when winning the first entrance A64, and when winning to the first entrance B640, “ 1/10 ". In addition, the probability of a big jackpot (15R normal jackpot) at the time of a big win is “7/20” when winning the first entrance A64, and “3/10” when winning the first entrance B640. "

  That is, the player who is awarded the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance B640 is given to the player, rather than the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance A64. The game value is likely to increase. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the determination of S351 is performed, and data corresponding to winning in the first entrance B B640 is preferentially shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c, and winning in the first entrance B 640 is made. The jackpot lottery based on is preferentially performed. Thereby, the player will be delighted depending on whether the first entrance to be awarded is the first entrance A64 or the first entrance B640, and the player will have a high interest game. Can be provided.

  In the process of S352, specifically, the data stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. Similarly, the data stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is transferred to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the data stored in the first change type counter storage area 203b3 is changed to the first change type counter storage area 203b2. The data stored in the second variation type counter storage area 203b4 is stored in the storage area 203c3, and the data stored in the third variation type counter storage area 203b4 is stored in the third variation type counter storage area 203b4. The type counter storage area 203c5 is shifted to.

  Then, the bit value “1” which is the start opening winning information is stored in the starting opening winning information storage area 203c6 of the holding ball execution area 203c (S353). Here, since the data corresponding to winning in the first entrance B640 is stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, the bit value “1” is stored in the start entrance winning information storage area 203c6. Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to an area (first to third area) having a smaller area number (S354). Then, the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is decremented by 1 (S355), and the process proceeds to S360.

  In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held), but the reserved areas (second to second) regardless of the presence or absence of data. You may comprise so that each data of 4) may each be shifted to the area where an area number is 1 smaller.

  Then, when the process of S355 or S359 is completed, a hold number command is set (S360). Here, a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA) and the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is set. . The hold number command set here is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 21). When the output hold number command is received by the production control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure A hold ball number NA indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure A hold lamp 85A. The same number of lamps as the special figure B reserved ball number NB indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure B hold lamp 85B.

  Next, the LED 37Aa in the first symbol display device 37A is turned on according to the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 203d (special figure A reserved ball number NA), and the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 203e (special figure). The LED 37Ba in the first symbol display device 37B is turned on according to the number B of reserved balls (NB), and the new number of times of holding is displayed in the lighting state (S361). When the process of S361 is completed, the reserved ball storage area forward feed process (S306) is terminated and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 22).

  According to the above-described reserved ball storage area forward process (S306) of FIG. 23, the determination process of S351 is performed, so that the special figure B reserved ball is stored rather than the data stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a. The data stored in the area 203b can be preferentially shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. Therefore, since the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the first entrance B640 can be preferentially performed, the jackpot lottery that tends to increase the game value given to the player can be preferentially performed. Therefore, the player will be delighted depending on whether the first entrance to be awarded is the first entrance A64 or the first entrance B640, and the player is provided with a highly interesting game. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the fluctuation start process (S307) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S307) of main controller 110. The variation start process (S307) determines whether it is a big hit or miss based on the data (each value of each counter C1-C2, CS1-CS3) stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, This is a process for starting the variable display according to the determination result, and is a process executed in the variable process (see FIG. 22).

  In this variation start process (S307), first, each data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). That is, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1 of the holding ball execution area 203c and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the first per-type counter storage area 203c2. A value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the first variation type counter storage area 203c3, a value of the second variation type counter CS2 stored in the second variation type counter storage area 203c4, The value of the third variation type counter CS3 stored in the third variation type counter storage area 203c5 and the starting port winning information (bit value “0” or “1”) stored in the starting port winning information storage area 203c6. And get.

  Then, the lottery result is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 and C2 acquired by the process of S401 and the start opening winning information (S402). As described above, whether or not the lottery result is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode (low probability state or high probability state) at that time. As shown in FIG. 6A, there are seven random numbers that are big hits at a low probability (when the big hit probability is normal), and the value is “0 to 6”. In addition, there are 70 random numbers that are jackpots at a high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and the value is “0 to 69”.

  Further, if it is determined that the jackpot is big, there are three types of jackpots ("first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation (15R probability variation)) based on the value of the first category counter C2 obtained by the processing of S401 and the start opening prize information. "Big jackpot)", "Second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)", "Normal jackpot (15R regular jackpot)") is determined.

  Note that, as described above, the distribution of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance A64 or the ball has won the first entrance B640. As shown in FIG. 6B, when the ball wins the first entrance A64, there are seven random numbers that become the first probability variation jackpot, and the value is “0 to 6”. . Similarly, the number of random numbers that become the second probability variation jackpot is 6 and its value is “7 to 12”, and the number of random numbers that usually becomes jackpot is 7 and its value is “13 to 19”. " On the other hand, when the ball wins the first entrance B640, the number of random numbers that becomes the first probability variation jackpot is 12, and the value is “0 to 11”, which is the second probability variation jackpot. The number of random numbers is two and the values are “12, 13”. The number of random numbers that are usually big hits is six and the values are “14 to 19”.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S402 is a jackpot (S403). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot acquired by the process of S402 is determined. Depending on the type, the display mode for the big hit is set (S404). That is, in the process of S404, the display mode during jackpot (LED 37Aa, 37Ba lighting state) in the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B, the display mode after jackpot (LED 37Aa, 37Ba lighting state) and Set each.

  When the type of jackpot is determined as “first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)”, the display mode corresponding to “first probability variation jackpot” is set as the display mode after the jackpot, and so on. In the case where “second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)” is determined, the display mode corresponding to “second probability variation jackpot” is determined as “normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot)”. In this case, a display mode corresponding to “normal jackpot” is set. In the effect control device 117, a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to correspond to the display mode set here.

  Further, in this embodiment, the red LED is turned on when shifting to the “first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)” after the jackpot ends, and “second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot ends. The green LED is lit when moving to ”, the yellow LED is lit when moving to“ normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot) ”after the jackpot is finished, and the blue LED is lit when it is off Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S403, when it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S402 is out (S403: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S405). That is, in the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol. It should be noted that in the effect control device 117, an outage stop symbol that is stopped and displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to correspond to the display mode set here.

  Next, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S402 and each value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 acquired in the process of S401 (S406). Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 6C, based on the lottery result and the value of the first variation type counter CS1, the rough variation time (“11 seconds”, “20 Second "," 40 seconds ", or" 60 seconds "), and, based on the determined fluctuation time and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the final stop symbol (this implementation) In this form, the fluctuation time (“± 0 second”, “+0.5 second”, or “−1 second”) until the middle symbol row Z2) stops is determined. Therefore, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is set by the determination of the variation time by the process of S406, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of 3 symbols is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time is determined based on the relationship between the lottery result and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, but the first variation without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2. It is also possible to set using only the value of the variation type counter CS1, and whether to set only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 or both values of the both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 each time. The value of the first variation type counter CS1, the value of the start opening prize information, the game conditions, and the like may be determined as appropriate.

  Next, an effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S407). Specifically, the addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3 acquired in the process of S401, and the display time of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is set. At the same time, the variation time of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In this embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the production time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added for 1 second, and when the variation display time is Four types of addition values are determined for adding 2 seconds and for subtracting 1 second from the variable display time.

  When the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect or notice character that makes the variable display time longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) For example, an effect of displaying the display, an effect of making the change time shorter than usual and stopping immediately). In the present embodiment, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is increased, and the player confirms the notice effect. You can expect a big hit.

  Next, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation time determined in the process of S406 is set (S408). The variation pattern command is individually provided for each variation time determined by the combination of the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Then, a stop symbol command indicating a stop symbol pattern is set according to the display mode (stop symbol) set in the processing of S404 or S405 and the variation time determined in the processing of S406 (S409). . As described above, in the present embodiment, “probable big hit symbol”, “normal jackpot symbol”, “front / rear miss reach symbol”, “reach symbol other than front / rear miss”, and “completely miss symbol” are provided as stop symbol patterns. It has been. Note that “completely missed symbols” includes “miss chance eyes”, and “rearly missed reach designs” and “reach symbols other than front and back missed” include “reach chance eyes”. ing.

  Specifically, when the display mode is set to “first probability variation jackpot” or “second probability variation jackpot”, the pattern of the stop symbol is “probability jackpot” regardless of the rough variation time of the symbol variation. A stop symbol command “design” is set. When the display mode is set to “normal jackpot”, a stop symbol command for setting the stop symbol pattern to “normal jackpot symbol” is set regardless of the rough variation time of symbol variation.

  In addition, when the display mode is set to “out” and the rough fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined to be “11 seconds”, a stop symbol command is set to set the stop symbol pattern to “completely off symbol”. The In addition, when the display mode is set to “out” and the rough variation time of the symbol variation is determined to be “20 seconds”, “40 seconds”, or “60 seconds”, the stop symbol pattern is changed to “ A stop symbol command of “rear out of front / rear” or “reach other than front / rear out” is set. Note that which of the two stop symbol patterns “rear out of front / rear reach” and “reach out of front / rear out of reach” is determined by, for example, each value of the first variation type counter CS1 or the second variation type counter CS2. Alternatively, it may be determined based on whether it is an odd number or an even number obtained by separately obtaining a random value or the like.

  Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S407 (S410), the variation start process (S307) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 22).

  Each command set in the variation start process (S307) is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 21). When the production control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the 3rd symbol display by the 3rd symbol display device 81), The variation effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81, the mode of the jackpot effect, and the stop symbol displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 are set.

  Here, when variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37A, the first symbol display device 37B, or the third symbol display device 81, a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 is displayed. The order will be described. As described above, in the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 21), the commands are transmitted in the order in which the commands are set. In addition, before the execution of the change start process (S307), the reserved ball storage area forward process (S306) is always executed.

  Therefore, the “holding number command” is set by the holding ball storage area forward processing (S306), and then the “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” by the variation start processing (S307). Commands are set in this order. Therefore, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, and “calculation time addition command”.

  Note that the “calculation time addition command” may be included in the “variation pattern command” without providing the “calculation time addition command”. In addition, these commands may be transmitted in a different order. Further, the order of command transmission may be changed to change the order of transmission. For example, if the “variation pattern command” is transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117, the variation display can be started even if the transmission of other commands is not completed. Therefore, the variable display can be started quickly. This is because the “pending number command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” and the like do not affect the start of the variable display.

  Further, the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside may be limited to a predetermined number (for example, 3) by executing the external output process (S201) once. For example, if the number of commands to be transmitted is large (for example, 6), the command is transmitted over two main processes (main process executed this time and main process executed next time). This is because if there are many commands to be transmitted at a time, it takes time to transmit and the main process may not be executed every 4 ms.

  When configured in this way, the command may be transmitted from a command with a high priority. Specifically, as described above, the “variation pattern command” is transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117, and thereafter, the “holding number command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” Etc. are transmitted over one or more main processes. Note that the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside by executing one external output process (S201) may be changed depending on the remaining time of the main process, the amount of information to be processed in each main process, and the like. good.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28, 29, and 30. FIG. The MPU 211 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and an NMI interrupt process that is started when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal. (Refer to FIG. 28). For convenience of explanation, the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 28, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control apparatus 111 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process of the payout control apparatus 111. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  In this NMI interrupt process, the same process as the NMI interrupt process of main controller 110 described above is executed. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process is started. Then, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 as setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and the NMI interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the payout control device 111. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the payout control device 111, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 211 is reset.

  First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  Thereafter, a data backup process for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211 is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S811. As will be described later in the processing of S917 of the main processing (see FIG. 30) of the payout control device 111, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 30) of the payout control device 111.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. In addition to clearing the information on the occurrence of power interruption (S807), in order to start paying out a winning ball or a loaned ball, permission to pay out a ball is set (S808). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 30) of the payout control device 111 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 111. The main process is a process for executing the ball payout control, which is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 29) of the payout control device 111 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and the like transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). This command determination processing is processing for executing processing corresponding to each command according to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 and received here. For example, the command determination processing is transmitted from the main control device 110. When a payout return command, a payout initialization command, or a prize ball command is received, the payout of prize balls or lending balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) is completed, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted (S902). If the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control device 110 is not yet started up. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the state return switch 120 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and when there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, a winning ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the total number of winning balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the winning ball control process is started to pay out winning balls (S909). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process.

  In the lending process of S910 to S912, if the lending is not disabled and a lending payout request from the card unit has been received (S910: No, S911: Yes), The lending control process is started (S912). On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes of S901 to S913 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. This means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are saved to the stack area, or the initial setting process of the payout control device 111 without saving the value of the stack pointer (S801). In (see FIG. 29), the processing can be started from S901 by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. In addition, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 47 and the schematic diagrams shown in FIGS. 48 and 49. The MPU 271 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a stop symbol pattern table that is updated after the power is turned on until it is shut off. There is a stop symbol pattern table update process to be continued.

  For convenience of explanation, the stop symbol pattern table update process (see FIG. 36) will be described first, followed by the startup process (see FIG. 31) and the main process (see FIG. 32) in this order.

  First, with reference to FIG. 36, the stop symbol pattern table update process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol pattern table update process of the effect control device 117. In the stop symbol pattern table update process, the stop symbol pattern table stored in the stop symbol pattern table memory 273k is repeatedly updated (for example, every 5 ms) after the start-up process (see FIG. 31) is completed. It is processing of. In the stop symbol pattern table update process, a symbol pattern generation area update process is first executed (S1501).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the symbol pattern generation area update process (S1501) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the symbol pattern generation area update process of the effect control device 117. The symbol pattern generation area update process (S1501) is a process for updating the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table, and is a process executed in the stop symbol pattern table update process (see FIG. 36). .

  In the symbol pattern generation area update process (S1501), first, 1 is added to the third area of the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S1531). Next, it is determined whether the value of the third area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S1532). If the value of the third area exceeds 18 (S1532: Yes), the value of the third area is the maximum value. This is a case where the virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is exceeded. Therefore, the third area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the second area (S1533). On the other hand, in S1532, if the value of the third area is 18 or less (S1532: No), each process of S1533 to S1537 is skipped, the symbol pattern generation area update process is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table The process returns to the update process (see FIG. 36).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the second area exceeds 20 (maximum value) (S1534). If the value of the second area exceeds 20 (S1534: Yes), the value of the second area is the maximum value. This is a case where (the array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2) is exceeded. Therefore, the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area (S1535). On the other hand, in S1534, when the value of the second area is 20 or less (S1534: No), each process of S1535 to S1537 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update process is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table The process returns to the update process (see FIG. 36).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the first area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S1536). If the value of the first area exceeds 18 (S1536: Yes), the value of the first area is the maximum value. This is a case where (the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1) is exceeded. Therefore, the first area is cleared to 1 (S1537). On the other hand, in S1536, when the value of the first area is 18 or less (S1536: No), each process of S1537 is skipped, this symbol pattern generation area update process is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table update process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 36).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the third area is incremented by 1, and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value, 1 is added to the second area, and the value of the second area is the maximum value. 1 is added to the first area, the area whose value is increased by 1 may be the second area or the first area. For example, if the value of the second area is increased by one, when the value of the second area reaches the maximum value, the second area is cleared to 1, and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value, the first area is cleared to 1, and 1 is added to the third area. When the third area reaches the maximum value, the third area is simply cleared to 1. Further, the value to be added is not limited to 1 and may be set arbitrarily. Further, a predetermined value may be added to each of the first to third areas.

  Also, a random number value (in the range of 1 to 18) corresponding to the first area may be acquired and set as the value of the first area, or a random number value (in the range of 1 to 20) corresponding to the second area may be obtained. It is good also as a value of a 2nd area, and it is good also as a value of a 3rd area by acquiring the random value (with the range of 1-18) corresponding to a 3rd area.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the symbol pattern generation area update process (S1501) is completed, it is next determined whether or not the updated symbol pattern generation area value indicates the stop symbol of the back and forth reach reach symbol (S1502). Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 corresponding to the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the value of the second area, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the value of the third area. It is determined whether or not the stop symbol combining the above and the other indicates a back-and-forth outreach symbol.

  In the processing of S1502, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach symbol (S1502: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is set in the front / rear out of reach reach area in the stop symbol pattern table. Store (S1503). Specifically, the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the first area of the front / rear reach area, and similarly, the value of the second area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the front / rear reach area. In the second area, the value of the third area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the third area of the front / rear reach area. Thereafter, the processing returns to S1501.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the front / rear out of reach symbol (S1502: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than front / rear out of reach. Is determined (S1504). When the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than front / back deviation (S1504: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the reach area other than front / back error in the stop symbol pattern table ( S1505). Thereafter, the processing returns to S1501.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1504, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the reach symbol other than the back and forth deviation (S1504: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the probability variation big hit symbol. Whether or not to display is determined (S1506), and if the stop symbol of the probability variation jackpot symbol is indicated (S1506: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the probability variation jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S1507). Thereafter, the processing returns to S1501.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1506, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the probability variation jackpot symbol (S1506: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicate the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol? Is determined (S1508), and when the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol is indicated (S1508: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S1509). Thereafter, the processing returns to S1501.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the normal jackpot symbol (S1508: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol of a completely out of symbol. It is. Therefore, the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the complete deviation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S1510). Thereafter, the processing returns to S1501.

  According to the stop symbol pattern table update process of FIG. 36 described above, the stop symbol pattern table can be constantly updated (for example, every 5 ms) from when the power is turned on until it is shut off. Since the value of each area in the stop symbol pattern table can always be updated, an irregular value is acquired every time the value of each area (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) is acquired. Therefore, since the arrangement of the 3rd symbol (stop symbol) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be various, it is possible to avoid the player from having a monotonous impression on the game, and to have high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has.

  In the stop symbol pattern table, various areas such as a probable jackpot area and a normal jackpot area are provided, but once the value of the symbol pattern generation area provided as a work area (third symbol arrangement information) ) And then the value is stored (copied) in the area corresponding to the updated value (probable jackpot area, normal jackpot area, etc.), so it is stored accurately in the desired area regardless of timing. The third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) can be acquired.

  For example, without providing a symbol pattern generation area, the value (third symbol arrangement information) of each area (probable big hit area or normal jackpot area) in the stop symbol pattern table is directly updated. In some cases, the desired third symbol arrangement information cannot be acquired. That is, if the value in the directly updated area is not a value corresponding to the area, the value in the area needs to be corrected to a correct value (updated again or moved to an appropriate area). However, if the value in the area is acquired before the processing is completed, the wrong third symbol arrangement information is acquired. In the present embodiment, the value of the symbol pattern generation area (third symbol arrangement information) is once updated, and then the value is stored in an area (probability variation jackpot area, normal jackpot area, etc.) according to the updated value ( Therefore, the third symbol arrangement information stored in the desired area can be obtained accurately regardless of the timing.

  In addition, without providing the symbol pattern generation area, the value (third symbol arrangement information) is directly updated in the area in the stop symbol pattern table (for example, the probability variation jackpot area, the normal jackpot area, etc.) to the updated value. The value may be stored (copied) in the corresponding area. In such a configuration, the period from when the value is updated in the area to when the updated value is stored (copied) into the area corresponding to the updated value is the length of the third symbol array information. Prohibit acquisition. Thereby, the 3rd symbol arrangement | sequence information memorize | stored in the desired area can be acquired correctly. Also, with this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a symbol pattern generation area, so that consumption of the storage area of the RAM 273 can be suppressed.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the effect control device 117. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002).

  In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, the power-on notification process is performed to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure A hold lamp 85A, the special figure B hold lamp 85B, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  After the power-on notification process is completed, in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275 and the video RAM 276 is displayed. (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (S1004).

  Next, the power-off process in progress flag is turned on to determine whether this startup process was executed because the MPU 271 was reset during the power-off process (see S1118 in FIG. 32) described later. It is determined based on whether or not it is present (S1005).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect controller 117 and the like. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, when the production control device 117 receives the power-off command, the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received is stored in the RAM 273 and the power-off process ( Step S1118 in FIG. 32 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag. Note that if the power supply is completely shut off during execution of the power-off process or after completion of the execution, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after any of the following three states. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As the second state, the power-off process (see S1118 in FIG. 32) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, after the power-off process was completed without power-off, the power-off process was completed. , MPU 271 has been reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. In other words, if the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 273 is held while the power-off process in progress flag remains off. Is done.

  If the current startup process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1006). Note that whether or not the data has been destroyed is that the data in the RAM 273 is normally held when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the data can be used to continue the control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to continue using the data to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007, and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1011.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the RAM 273 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (see S1118 in FIG. 32) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 271 was reset after the execution of the power cut-off process was completed. Thus, when the current startup process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1011.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1118 in FIG. 32) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power-off occurred. In this case, the MPU 271 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the entire storage area of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 273 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  Next, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273 (S1008: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 273 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1009). . By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 273. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 273 (S1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S1010), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 273 of an abnormality. Moreover, you may comprise so that abnormality of RAM273 may be alert | reported on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  In the process of S1011, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1011). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1118 in FIG. 32) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely cut off (see S1118 in FIG. 32). Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 271 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: Yes), the work area of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117 (S1012), the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013), and the interrupt is permitted. Is set (S1014), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 273 corresponds to the memories 273a to 273l of the RAM 273.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of start-up processing is, for example, when power is turned on again after the power is completely shut down (data in the RAM 273 including data of the power-off flag is lost). RAM 273 without resetting only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 due to noise or the like and turning on the power-off flag (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Is stored.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: No), S1012 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 273 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1013, the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1014, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason why the clear process in S1012 is skipped is that when only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the work area data in the RAM 273 is not cleared but saved. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued. For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the data can be used to continue the control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to continue using the data to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  In addition, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so that it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing of the effect control device 117. The main process is a process for executing control related to game effects (such as voice output and display), and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 31) of the effect control device 117 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed. Process.

  In the main process, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) was performed (S1101), and after the previous determination (the process of S1101) was performed, If 1 msec or more has elapsed (S1101: Yes), an audio lamp effect process is executed (S1102). The audio lamp effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, and is mainly a process for executing lighting control of various lamps and audio output control. When the sound lamp effect process (S1102) is completed, the process proceeds to S1103.

  On the other hand, if 1 msec or more has not elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) was executed (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103. The process of S1101 determines whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed, because the process of S1102 is mainly related to lamp lighting control and audio output control. This is because it is not necessary to execute in a short cycle (within 1 msec).

  In the process of S1103, it is determined whether 20 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1103) was executed (S1103), and 20 m after the previous determination (the process of S1103) was executed. If more than one second has elapsed (S1103: Yes), a variation effect process is executed (S1104). The variation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, and is a process for displaying a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). When this variation effect process (S1104) ends, the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if 20 milliseconds or more have not elapsed since the previous determination (the processing of S1103) was executed (S1103: No), the processing of S1104 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1105. The process of S1103 determines whether or not 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed since the previous determination was performed. The process of S1104 is based on the variation time of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). This is because it is a process to update in response, and therefore it is not necessary to execute it in a short cycle (within 20 milliseconds).

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i of the RAM 273 is ON (S1105).

  Note that, as described above, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is set to ON only when the execution of the variation effect in which the stop symbol becomes “out of symbol” is started, and the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is changed. The on state continues as long as possible. And when the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed, or when the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is changed to “chance”, it is set to OFF.

  Therefore, when the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed is changed, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is set to OFF, and the chance chance prohibition process (S1113) described later is skipped. The eye prohibition process is executed, and the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is not changed again to a stop symbol other than the “chance eye”. In addition, when an outlier long fluctuation is executed, the stop symbol is always “chance”, so the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is not turned on in the first place, and the chance chance prohibition process is skipped.

  In the process of S1105, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is off (S1105: No), the process of S1106 to S1113 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1114. On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on (S1105: Yes), the fluctuation time counter 273g of the RAM 273 is updated to the current elapsed time (S1106). Note that, as described above, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is a flag that is turned on only during a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed. Therefore, if the flag is on, the variable effect is always executed. . In addition, a fluctuating effect in which the lottery result is out is always executed (see S2107 and S2108 in FIG. 45).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 273g exceeds the maximum changeable period (see FIG. 13) (S1107), and when the value of the variable time counter 273g exceeds the maximum changeable period (S1107). : Yes), since it has become a period during which it is not possible to change the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed, the process proceeds to S1112. More specifically, in the process of S1107, it is determined whether 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the changing effect being executed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the variation time counter 273g does not exceed the maximum changeable period in the processing of S1107 (S1107: No), it is determined whether the variation effect being executed is out of variation (S1108). If the variation effect being executed is reach variation (that is, normal reach variation, super reach variation, special reach variation) (S1108: No), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 always have the same symbol, so the maximum Since the stop symbol can be changed until the changeable period elapses, each process of S1109 to S1113 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1114.

  On the other hand, when the variation effect being executed is out-of-range (S1108: Yes), the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273l is acquired (S1109). Then, it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information. (S1110) If there is the same symbol (S1110: Yes), it is possible to change the symbol of stoppage of outlier fluctuation until the maximum changeable period elapses, so each processing of S1111 to S1113 is skipped, and S1114. Move on to processing.

  As a result, when the deviation variation is executed, if there is the same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the stop symbol can be changed until the maximum changeable period (10 seconds) of the deviation variation has elapsed. Since the period flag is not turned off, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off can be made as close as possible to the time (11 seconds) at which all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed. it can. Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect until the time (11 seconds) when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed. , Can increase the chances of performing the consecutive chance eyes.

  In addition, even when there is no same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 when the deviation variation is executed, the upper symbol row Z1 starts to change (that is, the lower symbol row Z3 starts medium speed fluctuation). Until the stop symbol change possible period flag 273i is not turned off. Also in this case, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is turned off is set to each of the upper, middle, and lower timings compared to the case where the upper symbol row Z1 starts the middle speed fluctuation (less than 8 seconds). It can be as close as possible to the time (11 seconds) when all the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect until the time (11 seconds) at which all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed is approaching. , Can increase the chances of performing the consecutive chance eyes.

  On the other hand, if there is no identical symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S1110: No), it is determined in the third symbol display device 81 whether the upper symbol row Z1 has stopped (S1111). When the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped (S1111: Yes), it has become a period during which the stop symbol of the deviation fluctuation cannot be changed, and the process proceeds to S1112.

  In the process of S1111, when the upper symbol row Z1 is changing fast, changing medium or changing at low speed in the third symbol display device 81 (S1111: No), the change of the stop symbol of the deviation change is still made. Since it is possible, the process of S1112-S1113 is skipped and it transfers to the process of S1114.

  In the process of S1112, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is set to OFF (S1112), and then the chance chance prohibition process is executed (S1113). Although the chance chance prohibition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, the stop symbol is accidentally “chanced” by the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 45) although the continuous chance eye effect is not executed. This is a process for changing the stop symbol to an off symbol other than “chance eye” when “eye” is set. When the chance chance prohibition process (S1113) is completed, the process proceeds to S1114.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the variable effect is accidentally set to “chance eye” even though the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, the timing when the stop symbol cannot be changed The stop symbol is changed to an off symbol other than the “chance”. For example, if you change the stop symbol to “Chance Eye” without waiting for the timing when the stop symbol cannot be changed, then if the continuous chance effect production starts, the temporarily changed stop The symbol must be changed to “chance” again. However, if the stop symbol is changed after waiting until the stop symbol cannot be changed, the stop symbol can be prevented from being changed again, so that the number of stop symbol changes can be suppressed, and the control burden can be reduced.

  In the process of S1114, a command determination process is executed (S1114). Note that the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, but is processing for executing processing according to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110. When this command determination processing (S1114) is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 273 (S1115). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S1115, when the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1115: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption process flag are turned on (S1117), and the power interruption process is executed (S1118). . After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1119), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the voice output device 226, the special figure A hold lamp 85A, the special figure B hold lamp 85B, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display The output to the lamp 34 and the third symbol display device 81 is turned off. In addition, the storage of information on occurrence of power interruption is also deleted. Each output port is turned off in order to prevent abnormal display and abnormal audio output from being performed. The player should not be confused by abnormal display or abnormal audio output. Because.

  In the process of S1115, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S1115: No), whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed based on the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 273 (see the process of S1009 in FIG. 31). Is determined (S1116), and if the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1116: No), the process returns to the process of S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1116 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM 273 is destroyed in the process of S1116 (S1116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. When it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure A hold lamp 85A, the special figure B hold lamp 85B, The RAM destruction may be notified on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  32, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is turned off can be made as close as possible to the time at which all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect until the time when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed is approached. It is possible to increase the chance of performing the production.

  In addition, while the continuous chance eye effect can be executed by replacing only the third symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are changing at high speed, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is set to ON while the medium symbol is changing. If the continuous chance stage effect cannot be executed unless the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during the low speed fluctuation or the stop display is replaced, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is set to OFF. After the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is turned off, it is not determined whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect (is skipped). It is possible to prevent the 3 symbols from being changed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the third symbol that can be recognized by the player from being changed, it is possible to prevent an unnatural fluctuation effect from being performed for the player. Therefore, the value of the fluctuating effect can be improved, and the value of the continuous chance eye effect can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the audio lamp effect process (S1102) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the sound lamp effect process (S1102) of the effect control device 117. The audio lamp effect process (S1102) is mainly a process for executing lamp lighting control and audio output control, and is a process executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 32).

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1102), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set so as to be in the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1205 described later. (S1201). Then, the customer waiting effect process of S1202 is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S1203). In the customer waiting effect process, when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen. In the hold number display update process, the number of lights of the special figure A hold lamp 85A and the number of lights of the special figure B hold lamp 85B are updated based on the hold number command transmitted from the main controller 110 and received. The

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1204). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1204 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1205), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1206). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1206, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1207), the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and received. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S1205 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1206 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the changing effect process (S1104) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the variable effect process (S1104) of the effect control device 117. The variation effect process (S1104) is a process for displaying a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), and is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) described above. Process.

  In the variation effect process (S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1301). If it is medium (S1301: Yes), the jackpot presentation process is executed (S1302). In the jackpot effect process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, the background image is updated for each round (for example, the effect data is read from the character ROM 275 for each round, and the predetermined number in the video RAM 276 is set. Write to the area). After the big hit effect process (S1302) ends, the variable effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the changing effect is being executed (fluctuating) in the third symbol display device 81 (S1303). (S1303: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 273h of the RAM 273 is ON (S1304). As described above, the change start flag 273h is a flag that is turned on when the start of the change effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110, and is turned off when the change effect is started. Specifically, the flag is set to ON when a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received (see S1604 in FIG. 38).

  If the variation start flag 273h is OFF in the processing of S1304 (S1304: No), other display processing is executed (S1313), and the variation effect processing is terminated. The other display process is, for example, a display process such as a customer waiting effect that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when the fluctuation start flag 273h is on (S1304: Yes), first, the fluctuation start flag 273h is turned off (S1305). Then, the variation time counter 273g of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0), the variation time count is started (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1308. As described above, the variation time counter 273g is a counter that stores the elapsed time since the variation effect was started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when the change effect is being executed (changed) (S1303: Yes), the value of the change time counter 273g is updated (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the scheduled variation effect has been executed to the end (S1308). For example, if the value of the variation time counter 273g exceeds the value of the variation time memory 273f, it is determined that the planned variation effect has been executed to the end. Note that all of the moving images prepared for the variation effect may be displayed, and it may be determined whether the variation effect has been executed to the end based on whether there is no more data to be displayed.

  In the process of S1308, when it is determined that the scheduled variation effect has not been executed to the end (S1308: No), it is determined whether it is the display time of the stop symbol (S1309). For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time of the variation time counter 273g has reached the stop symbol stop display time set for the variation effect being executed, and the elapsed time becomes the stop symbol stop display time. It is determined that it is time to display a stop symbol.

  In the processing of S1309, if it is not the stop symbol display time yet (S1309: No), the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is used by using the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276. ) Displays an image corresponding to the fluctuation effect data (fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) (S1310). As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-time variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed variation, and stop is image data of a stop symbol. This is performed based on the symbol data. Then, when the process of S1310 is completed, the variation effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, if it is the stop symbol display time in the processing of S1309 (S1309: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 is used by using the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276. The stop symbol is displayed on the (LCD) (S1311). Then, the variation effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32).

  In the process of S1308, when it is determined that the planned variation effect has been executed to the end (S1308: Yes), the third symbol display device is used until a stop command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. The image being displayed is held in 81 (LCD) (S1312). Specifically, the display of a new image on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is stopped. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), the displayed image remains displayed without change. When the process of S1312 ends, the variation effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32).

  34, the moving image (image) and the stop symbol corresponding to the variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). In addition, a variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) can be performed based on the variation effect data and the stop symbol data. Specifically, when the variation effect is started, first, the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a is read, and an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed as the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. Each time the stop symbol display time is reached, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b is read and the stop symbol is displayed.

  That is, since the data used for one variation effect is stored in different storage areas 276a and 276b, and read out as necessary, it is within the variation effect time and before the display time of the stop symbol If so, the stop symbol data once set (stored) after the start of the variation effect can be rewritten (overwritten) with another stop symbol data. Therefore, after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect), the stop symbol can be changed to “chance”.

  Next, the chance chance prohibition process (S1113) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the chance chance prohibition process (S1113) of the effect control device 117. The chance chance prohibition process (S1113) is performed when the stop symbol is accidentally set to “chance eye” by the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 45) even though the continuous chance eye effect is not executed. This is a process for changing the stop symbol to an off symbol other than “chance eyes”. Moreover, it is a process performed in the main process (refer FIG. 32) mentioned above.

  In addition, as described in the processing of S1105 in FIG. 32, when the stop symbol replacement process in FIG. 42 described later is executed and the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is changed to “chance eye”, the stop symbol change is performed. Since the possible period flag 273i is turned off, this chance chance prohibition process is skipped. Therefore, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is not changed again to a stop symbol other than “chance eyes”. In addition, when an outlier long fluctuation is executed, the stop symbol is always “chance”, so the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is not turned on in the first place, and this chance chance prohibition process is skipped.

  In the chance chance prohibition process (S1113), first, the third symbol array information stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273l of the RAM 273 is acquired (S1401). Next, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information are respectively acquired (S1402).

  Then, it is determined whether each of the acquired symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a symbol row constituting a chance eye (S1403). If each of the acquired symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is not a symbol sequence constituting a chance eye (S1403: No), there is no need to change the stop symbol, so the processing of S1404 to S1406 is skipped and this chance chance prohibition is made. The process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, when each acquired symbol row Z1 to Z3 is a symbol row constituting a chance eye (S1403: Yes), the acquired upper symbol row Z1, Of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (S1404).

  For example, in the process of S1404, the third symbol is changed so that the stop symbol becomes “completely missed symbol”, “front / rearly missed reach”, or “reach symbol other than front / rearly missed” according to the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed. Replace. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is changed to “chance” by the stop symbol replacement process of FIG. 42 described later, the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed is “out of change”. If this is the case, the stop symbol will be changed to “Learning chance”, and if the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed is “reach variation (ie, normal reach variation, super reach variation, special reach variation)”, stop The symbol is changed to “Reach Chance”.

  Therefore, here, if the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed is “out-of-range variation”, the third symbol is replaced so that the stop symbol becomes “completely deviated symbol”, and the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed is “ In the case of reach variation (ie, normal reach variation, super reach variation, special reach variation), the third symbol is replaced so that the stop symbol becomes “front / rear out of reach reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”.

  Next, the third symbol arrangement information indicating the stop symbols newly formed by the replacement of the third symbol (completely out of symbol, front / rear out of reach symbol, reach symbol other than out of front / back) is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273l ( S1405). Then, only the stop symbol data of the portion that has been changed by the replacement of the third symbol in the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b is replaced (S1406).

  Specifically, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273l is acquired from the character ROM 275 and replaced (changed). ) Only the stop symbol data corresponding to the portion is overwritten in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Then, the chance chance prohibition process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32).

  According to the chance chance prohibition process (S1113) in FIG. 35 described above, when the stop pattern of the variable effect is accidentally set to “chance eye” even though the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, The stop symbol can be changed to an off symbol other than “chance eyes”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the “chance eyes” displayed during the continuous chance eyes effect from being displayed even though the continuous chance eyes effect is not executed, so that the value of the continuous chance eyes effect can be increased.

  In other words, as described above, the continuous chance eye effect suggests to the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player, depending on the number of variation effects performed continuously or intermittently. is there. Therefore, if the “chance eye” is displayed accidentally even though the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, the player cannot improve the expectation of an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, not only the player's expectation is impaired, but the player feels unsatisfactory and dissatisfied. In particular, if accidental “chance eyes” are frequently displayed, the player will repeatedly feel unsatisfied and dissatisfied. As a result, the value of the continuous chance eye effect is reduced.

  However, in this embodiment, when the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, the display of “chance eye” is prohibited and the display is changed to a stop symbol other than “chance eye”, so the continuous chance eye effect is executed. Only in the case of a “chance” is displayed. Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, the player can easily recognize that the continuous chance eye effect is being executed. Further, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to impress the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed. Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation of an advantageous gaming state, and at the same time, the game will be performed in accordance with the variation effect to be executed and the number of continuous display of the “chance eye”. Can attract the interest of the people. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect.

  In the present embodiment, even if the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, if the change effect stop symbol is accidentally set to “chance eye”, the stop symbol cannot be changed. The stop symbol is changed to an off symbol other than the “chance eye”. For example, if you change the stop symbol to “Chance Eye” without waiting for the timing when the stop symbol cannot be changed, then if the continuous chance effect production starts, the temporarily changed stop The symbol must be changed to “chance” again. However, if the stop symbol is changed after waiting until the stop symbol cannot be changed, the stop symbol can be prevented from being changed again, so that the number of stop symbol changes can be suppressed, and the control burden can be reduced. Note that the stop symbol may be changed to “chance” without waiting until the timing when the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, in order to minimize the change of the third symbol constituting the stop symbol, only the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced and the stop symbol other than the “chance eye” symbol is replaced. Has been changed. Therefore, since the process for replacing the third symbol is reduced as compared with the case where the third symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced, the control burden can be reduced. Note that the third symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 may be respectively replaced.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, replacement of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol will be described. Here, as an example, a case will be described in which the stop symbol constituting the “reach chance eye” is replaced with the stop symbol constituting the “rearward / rearward reach symbol”.

  FIG. 48A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273l before the third symbol is replaced (before the change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the contents. b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273l after replacing (changing) the third symbol and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48A, “4” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273l, “6” is stored in the second area, and “13” is stored in the third area. Suppose that In this state, when a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, “A fish (8)”, “shell”, “ A symbol row alongside “Dugong (7)” is displayed.

  Similarly, in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol rows arranged as “shell”, “shark (4)”, “shell” in order from left to right, and the lower symbol row Z3 from left to right. In order, a symbol row lined up with “Dugong (7)”, “Shell”, “A Fish (8)” is displayed.

  Therefore, reach has occurred in L4 and L5 among the five effective lines L1 to L5, but it is not a hit, and the symbol “shark” enters the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. The stop pattern of the “reach chance” displayed in various reach fluctuations (that is, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation) is shown.

  As described above, when there is the same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol, the medium symbol variation of the middle symbol column Z2 is started regardless of the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed. The stop symbol can be changed until before (less than 10 seconds). Here, in order to change the stop symbol to “rear and front reach design”, the middle symbol row Z2 is set so that “Dugon (7)” and “shark (4)” do not enter the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. The 3rd pattern of will be replaced. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row lined up with “Ancho (6)”, “Shell”, “Dugong (7)” in order from left to right.

  When the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced in this way, reach is generated in the effective line L4 and the effective line L5, but it is not successful, and the symbol “Dugong” is displayed in the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. Because it enters, it becomes a “rear and front reach design”.

  Then, when the stop symbol can be changed to “rear and front-reach reach symbol”, the array element number “11” indicating the changed middle symbol row Z2 is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273l. As a result, “out-of-front / rear reach design” is displayed on the display screen of the 3rd design display device 81 as the stop design of the variation effect being executed.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol may be replaced so that the symbol “Dugong” is arranged on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2. Further, the third symbol may be replaced so that the symbol “A fish” is arranged on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 or the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2.

  In the above example, only the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, but the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are replaced. The third symbol may be replaced, or the third symbols of the three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be replaced.

  In the above example, the case where the stop symbol constituting the “reach chance eye” is replaced with the stop symbol constituting the “front / rear miss reach symbol” is described, but the “reach symbol other than front / rear miss” is configured. Similarly, when replacing with the stop symbol, the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 may be replaced. In this case, the third symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 may be replaced, or the third symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be replaced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the command determination process (S1114) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1114) of the effect control device 117. The command determination process (S1114) is a process for executing processes according to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110, and is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) described above.

  As described above, the command transmitted from main controller 110 and received by effect control device 117 is temporarily stored in a command storage area (not shown) in RAM 273 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The This command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. In this command determination process, whether or not various commands have been received is confirmed by confirming whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the command storage area.

  In the command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a winning information command is received (S1601). If a winning information command is received (S1601: Yes), a stop symbol instruction storing process is executed (S1602). As described above, the winning information command includes a lottery result and a variation time pre-read for a new win, and the pre-read data based on the winning to the first entrance A64 (for example, a bit value “ 0 ”) or start opening winning information indicating whether the first winning opening B640 is based on winning (for example, bit value“ 1 ”).

  Further, the stop symbol instruction storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. The set value and the variation time corresponding to the received winning information command are set in accordance with the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storing area 273a or the special symbol B stop symbol. This is a process for storing in the instruction storage area 273b. When the stop symbol instruction storing process (S1602) ends, the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the winning information command is not received in the process of S1601 (S1601: No), the process of S1602 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S1603.

  In the process of S1603, it is determined whether the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received (S1603). If the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received (S1603: Yes), the variation effect setting process is executed. (S1604).

  As described above, the variation pattern command is a command corresponding to the variation time of the variation effect to be executed. In other words, the variation pattern command is also a command indicating the variation time. The effect time addition command is a command indicating the extension time or shortening time of the variable effect to be executed. The variation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, and is a process for setting the variation effect data necessary for starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation effect setting process (S1604) ends, the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1603, when the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are not received (S1603: No), the process of S1604 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S1605. In the process of S1605, it is determined whether a stop symbol command has been received (S1605). If a stop symbol command has been received (S1605: Yes), a stop symbol setting process is executed (S1606).

  As described above, the stop symbol command is a command indicating a stop symbol pattern to be displayed in the variation effect to be executed. Further, the stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, and is a process for setting a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or that is to be started. When the stop symbol setting process (S1606) ends, the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the stop symbol command is not received in the process of S1605 (S1605: No), the process of S1606 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S1607.

  In the process of S1607, it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1607). If a stop command has been received (S1607: Yes), the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is terminated (S1608). . Then, the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the stop symbol command has not been received in the process of S1607 (S1607: No), the process of S1608 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1609.

  In the process of S1609, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1609). If another command has been received (S1609: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S1610). For example, when a power-off command is received, the power-off occurrence information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 273.

  Also, for example, if a hold number command is received, when the hold number display update process (see S1203 in FIG. 33) is executed, the number is the same as the special figure A hold ball number NA indicated by the received hold number command. The lamp is set to turn on in the special figure A hold lamp 85A, and the same number of lamps as the special figure B hold ball number NB indicated by the received hold number command are turned on in the special figure B hold lamp 85B. Such as setting. On the other hand, if no other command is received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), the processing of S1610 described above is skipped, the command determination processing is terminated, and the main processing (see FIG. 32) is performed. Return.

  Next, the stop symbol instruction storing process (S1602) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol instruction storing process (S1602) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol instruction storage process (S1602) is a process for storing the set value and the variation time corresponding to the received winning information command in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. It is. The stop symbol instruction storing process (S1602) is a process that is executed every time a winning information command is received, and is a process that is executed in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  In the stop symbol instruction storing process (S1602), first, the lottery result, the variation time, and the start opening winning information are acquired from the received winning information command (S1701). As described above, the lottery result will be one of the following four: “first probability variation jackpot”, “second probability variation jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, and “off”. The information is one of a bit value “0” and a bit value “1”.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired start opening winning information is a bit value “1” (S1702). As described above, when the start opening prize information is the bit value “0”, it indicates that the acquired lottery result and the variation time are based on winning in the first entrance A64, and the start opening When the winning information is the bit value “1”, it indicates that the acquired lottery result and the variation time are based on winning in the first entrance B640. In the processing of S1702, if the start opening winning information is the bit value “1” (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special figure B holding ball counter 273e in the RAM 273 (S1703).

  Then, the setting value corresponding to the lottery result acquired by the processing of S1701 and the variation time are determined from the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b of the RAM 273. Then, it is stored in each storage area 273b1, 273b2 in the area corresponding to the special figure B reserved ball number NB (S1704). As described above with reference to FIG. 17C, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is “set value: miss” if the lottery result is “out”, and if the lottery result is “probable big hit”. “Set value: Probable big hit”, and if the lottery result is “Normal big hit”, “Set value: Normal big hit”.

  For example, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e updated by the processing of S1703 (the special figure B reserved ball number NB) is “1”, the lottery is selected in the set value storage area 273b1 of the hold first area. The set value corresponding to the result is stored, and the change time is stored in the change time storage area 273b2 of the first hold area. That is, if the special figure B reserved ball number NB is “X (X = 1 to 4)”, the set value and the variation time are stored in the storage areas 273b1 and 273b2 of the reserved X area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired by the process of S1701 is a “hit” (S1707). If the acquired lottery result is “hit” (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1709. . On the other hand, if the acquired lottery result is “out” (S1707: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation time acquired by the processing of S1701 is a time corresponding to “outside long fluctuation” (S1708). Specifically, it is determined whether the rough variation time of the symbol variation is “20 seconds”. Even when the acquired fluctuation time is a time corresponding to “outside long fluctuation” (S1708: Yes), the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the process of S1709, a continuous effect start determination process is executed (S1709). The continuous production start determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, but is a process for determining whether to start the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. is there.

  When the continuous effect start determination process (S1709) ends, the stop symbol instruction storage process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, in the processing of S1708, when the obtained fluctuation time is not the time corresponding to “outward long fluctuation” (S1708: No), the processing of S1709 is skipped, and this stop symbol instruction storage processing is terminated, and the command The process returns to the determination process (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, if the start opening winning information is the bit value “0” in the processing of S1702 (S1702: No), 1 is added to the value of the special figure A holding ball counter 273d in the RAM 273 (S1705). Then, the setting value corresponding to the lottery result acquired by the processing of S1701 and the variation time are determined from the free reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storing area 273a of the RAM 273. Then, it is stored in each storage area 273a1, 273a2 in the area corresponding to the special figure A reserved ball number NA (S1706). As described above with reference to FIG. 17C, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is “set value: miss” if the lottery result is “out”, and the lottery result is “probable big hit”. Is “set value: probable big hit”, and “set value: normal big hit” if the lottery result is “normal big hit”.

  For example, if the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 273d (special figure A reserved ball number NA) updated by the processing of S1705 is “1”, the lottery is drawn in the set value storage area 273a1 of the hold first area The set value corresponding to the result is stored, and the change time is stored in the change time storage area 273a2 of the first hold area. That is, if the special figure A reserved ball number NA is “X (X = 1 to 4)”, the set value and the variation time are stored in the storage areas 273a1 and 273a2 of the reserved X area. Then, the stop symbol instruction storing process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  According to the stop symbol instruction storing process of FIG. 39 described above, when a winning information command is received, if the winning information command is based on winning in the first entrance A64, it corresponds to the winning information command. The set value and the variation time to be stored can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a. Therefore, in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a, the area with the smaller area number can store the data corresponding to the older winnings in time, so that the temporal winning order (winning order) is given. Data can be stored.

  Further, when the winning information command is received, if the winning information command is based on winning in the first entrance B640, the setting value and the variation time corresponding to the winning information command are stopped in the special figure B. It can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the empty reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the symbol instruction storage area 273b. Therefore, in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, the area with the smaller area number can store the data corresponding to the older winnings in time, so that the temporal winning order (winning order) is given. Data can be stored.

  In addition, when a winning information command is received, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous chance eye effect on the condition that the winning information command is based on winning at the first entrance B640 (S1709). Therefore, depending on whether or not the player has knowledge of the characteristics of the gaming machine 10 or the like, it is possible to prevent the player's ball driving method from changing. Therefore, each player can enjoy the game fairly. Moreover, since it can suppress that a player stops driving | injecting a ball | bowl, it can also suppress that the operating rate of a game machine falls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the continuous effect start determination process (S1709) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing continuous effect start determination processing (S1709) of the effect control device 117. The continuous effect start determination process (S1709) is a process for determining whether to start the continuous chance effect based on the content of the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, and is a stop symbol instruction storage process (FIG. 39). This is a process executed in the reference).

  In the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect is based on the number of pending variable effects executed in response to winning at the first entrance B640 and the presence or absence of the variable effect being executed. Done. More specifically, firstly, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect can be executed only by the amount of variation effect held depending on the winning at the first entrance B640, and if it can be executed, Only the reserve of the variation effect executed in response to the winning at the first entrance B640 is used, and the continuous chance effect is executed.

  On the other hand, if the number of reserves is insufficient and the continuous chance effect cannot be executed, the variable effect being executed is added to the variable effect held in response to winning at the first entrance B640. In addition, it is determined whether a continuous chance eye effect can be executed. If it is feasible, a continuous chance eye effect is executed by using the variation effect being executed and the reserve of the change effect executed in response to winning at the first entrance B640. If the continuous chance effect is impossible to execute even if the variation effect being executed is added, the continuous chance effect is not executed.

  In this continuous effect start determination process (S1709), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e in the RAM 273 (the special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 3 or more (S1801). When the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 3 or more (S1801: Yes), the variable effect executed in response to the winning at the first entrance B640 is held. Since it is a case where the continuous chance eye effect can be executed with only minutes, the process proceeds to S1804.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is less than 3 (S1801: No), the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) ) Is 2 (S1802). If the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 2 (S1802: Yes), the continuous effect C (see FIG. 8) can be executed as the continuous chance effect. If the medium variation effect is used, there is a possibility that a continuous chance effect (continuous effect A or continuous effect B) with a longer effect period can be executed.

  Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the variation effect being executed can be used, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i of the RAM 273 is ON (S1803). As described above, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is a flag that is turned on only during a period in which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed. If the flag is on, the variable effect is always executed. In addition, a fluctuating effect in which the lottery result is out is always executed (see S2107 and S2108 in FIG. 45).

  If the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on (S1803: Yes), the process is shifted to S1804 because it is possible to use the variation effect being executed. On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is off (S1803: No), the changing effect being executed cannot be used, but since the continuous effect C can be executed, the process proceeds to S1809.

  In the processing of S1804, it is determined whether or not the lottery result included in the received winning information command is “15R jackpot” (S1804). That is, it is determined whether it is “first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)” or “normal jackpot (15R ordinary jackpot)”. If the lottery result is “15R jackpot” (S1804: Yes), the continuous effect A start process is executed (S1805), the continuous effect start determination process is terminated, and the stop symbol instruction storing process (see FIG. 39). Return to). The continuous production A start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but is a process for starting the continuous production A (see FIG. 8) as a continuous chance eye production.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1804, if the lottery result is other than “15R jackpot” (S1804: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is “2R probability variation jackpot (second probability variation jackpot)” (S1806). . When the lottery result is “2R probability variation big hit” (S1806: Yes), the continuous effect B start process is executed (S1807), the continuous effect start determination process is terminated, and the stop symbol instruction storing process (FIG. 39). Return to Reference).

  The continuous production B start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, but is a process for starting the continuous production B (see FIG. 8) as a continuous chance eye production. On the other hand, in the process of S1806, when the lottery result is other than “2R probability variation big hit” (S1806: No), the lottery result is “out”, and the process proceeds to S1809.

  In the processing of S1802, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is other than 2 (S1802: No), the special figure B reserved ball number NB is 1 or 0. Since the special figure B reserved ball number NB is insufficient, the continuous chance eye effect cannot be executed only by the reserve of the variable effect executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640. Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the variation effect being executed can be used, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on (S1808).

  When the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on (S1808: Yes), the continuous effect C can be executed as the continuous chance eye effect because the changing effect being executed can be used. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S1809. In the process of S1809, a continuous effect C start process is executed (S1809), the continuous effect start determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the stop symbol instruction storing process (see FIG. 39). The continuous effect C start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, but is a process for starting the continuous effect C (see FIG. 8) as a continuous chance effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is OFF in the processing of S1808 (S1808: No), it is a case where the continuous chance effect cannot be executed, so this continuous effect start determination process is terminated, The process returns to the stop symbol instruction storing process (see FIG. 39).

  According to the above-described continuous performance start determination process (S1709) of FIG. 40, when the continuous chance effect can be executed only by the pending portion of the variable performance executed in response to winning at the first entrance B640. The continuous chance eye effect can be executed using only the reserved variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the number of reserves is insufficient and it is impossible to execute the continuous chance stage effect only with the reserved variation effect, the variation effect to be executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640. It is possible to execute the continuous chance eye effect by adding the variable effect being executed to the hold. Therefore, as compared with the case where the continuous chance eyes are executed only with the suspended fluctuation effects, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance eyes effects can be added to the part of the continuous chance eyes effect. Can be increased. Therefore, a player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition to the continuous production A and the continuous production B, the continuous production C can also be executed, so that the chances of executing the continuous chance eye production can be increased and the chances of displaying the “chance eyes” can be increased. . On the other hand, when the continuous effect A, the continuous effect B, and the continuous effect C are not executed, the display of “chance eyes” is prohibited. Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to increase the chances of impressing the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted by the continuous chance eye effect. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the continuous effect A start process (S1805) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the follow-up effect A start process (S1805) of the effect control device 117. The continuous effect A start process (S1805) is a process for starting the continuous effect A (see FIG. 8) as a continuous chance effect, and is a process executed in the continuous effect start determination process (see FIG. 40). is there.

  In the continuous effect A start process (S1805), first, the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e in the RAM 273 (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 2, and the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on. It is determined whether it exists (S1901). Note that, as described above, the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e is a counter that counts the number of winnings held for the first entrance B640, that is, the number of special figure B held balls NB, and a stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is a flag that is turned on only within a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed.

  In the process of S1901, if the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 2 and the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on (S1901: Yes), This is a case where the continuous production A (continuous chance effect) is executed by adding the variation production being executed to the pending production of the variation production executed in response to winning at the 1 entrance B640.

  In this case, first, a stop symbol replacement process is executed (S1902). The stop symbol replacement process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to the “chance”. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed, the third symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that is changing at high speed is replaced, and the stop symbol becomes “chance eye”. Be changed.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1902) is completed, the set value stored in the set value storage area 273c1 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is changed to “set value: chance” (S1903). Next, in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, the setting value of the setting value storage area 273c1 in the holding area in which the data (setting value and variation time) of the previous (one time before) winning is stored is stored. “Setting value: chance” is changed (S1904). In the continuous performance A, the set value of the holding area in which the data of the current winning prize is stored is not changed. As a result, the stop symbol of the variation effect can be set to the “chance” twice in succession, and the stop symbol of the third change effect can be set to the “probable big hit symbol” or the “normal jackpot symbol”. And this continuous production A start process is complete | finished, and it returns to a continuous production start determination process (refer FIG. 40).

  In the process of S1901, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is other than 2 or the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is off (S1901: No), This is a case in which a continuous chance eye effect is executed only by holding the variable effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640.

  In this case, in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, the holding area in which the previous winning data (the previous time) winning data (setting value and variation time) are stored, and the previous time (twice before) The setting value of each setting value storage area 273c1 in the holding area storing the winning data is changed to “setting value: chance” (S1905). In the continuous performance A, the set value of the holding area in which the data of the current winning prize is stored is not changed. As a result, the stop symbol of the variation effect can be set to the “chance” twice in succession, and the stop symbol of the third change effect can be set to the “probable big hit symbol” or the “normal jackpot symbol”. And this continuous production A start process is complete | finished, and it returns to a continuous production start determination process (refer FIG. 40).

  According to the continuous effect A start process (S1805) of FIG. 41 described above, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed and the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage so that the continuous effect A (continuous chance eye effect) is executed. The set value in the area 273b can be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the stop symbol replacement process (S1902) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol replacement process (S1902) is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to “the chance chance”, and is executed in the above-described continuous effect A start process (see FIG. 41). It is processing. In addition, it is also a process performed in the continuous effect B start process (refer FIG. 43) mentioned later and the continuous effect C start process (refer FIG. 44) mentioned later. This stop symbol replacement process is a process that is executed only when the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be replaced with a chance (that is, only when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on). is there. Therefore, for example, it is not executed after the middle symbol row Z2 has a medium speed fluctuation.

  In the stop symbol replacement process (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol set flag 273j of the RAM 273 is ON (S2001). As described above, the stop symbol set flag 273j is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the variation effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set (see FIG. 47, S2310).

  In the process of S2001, when the stop symbol set flag 273j is off (S2001: No), it is a case where the stop symbol command has not been received yet and the stop symbol of the variable effect is not set. In this case, the stop symbol has not been determined and the replacement of the stop symbol cannot be performed. Therefore, the process waits until the stop symbol command is received and the stop symbol of the variable effect is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when the stop symbol set flag 273j is on (S2001: Yes), the third symbol arrangement information stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273l of the RAM 273 is acquired (S2002). Next, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information are respectively acquired (S2003).

  Then, it is determined whether or not each of the acquired symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a symbol row constituting a chance eye (S2004), and if each of the acquired symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a symbol row constituting a chance eye (S2004) : Yes), when the stop symbol command is received and the stop symbol of the changing effect is set, the chance eye is accidentally set as the stop symbol of the changing effect. Therefore, in this case, there is no need to bother changing the stop pattern of the variation effect, so each process of S2005 to S2011 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2012.

  In the process of S2004, if each of the acquired symbol strings Z1 to Z3 is not a symbol string that constitutes a chance (S2004: No), the same symbol (in the upper symbol string Z1 and the lower symbol string Z3 acquired in the process of S2003) ( It is determined whether there is a main symbol (S2005). When the same symbol is present in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S2005: Yes), the symbol symbol Z1 and Z3 are common to the symbol symbol Z1 and Z3 from the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in the process of S2003. Then, one existing third symbol (same main symbol) is selected (S2008). Then, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2003 is replaced so that a chance is formed by the selected third symbol (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010.

  For example, in the process of S2009, the third symbol is replaced so that the stop symbol becomes “a chance to miss” or “a chance to reach” according to the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed. Specifically, if the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed is “displacement variation”, the third symbol is replaced so that the stop symbol becomes “an opportunity to miss”, and the variation pattern of the variation effect being executed is “ If “reach fluctuation (ie, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach fluctuation)”, the third symbol is replaced so that the stop symbol becomes “the reach chance”.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2005, when there is no identical symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in the processing of S2003 (S2005: No), the third symbol is selected from the upper symbol row Z1 acquired in S2003. One symbol (main symbol) is selected (S2006). Then, the third symbols of the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2003 are replaced so that the chance symbol is constituted by the selected third symbol (S2007).

  Next, the 3rd symbol arrangement | sequence information which shows the stop symbol (chance eyes) newly comprised by replacement | exchange of a 3rd symbol is memorize | stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273l (S2010). Then, only the stop symbol data of the portion that has been changed by the replacement of the third symbol in the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b is replaced (S2011).

  Specifically, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273l is acquired from the character ROM 275 and replaced (changed). ) Only the stop symbol data corresponding to the portion is overwritten in the stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  Then, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i of the RAM 273 is set to OFF (S2012), the stop symbol replacement process is terminated, and the process returns to the continuous effect A start process (see FIG. 41). In addition, when this stop symbol replacement process is executed in a continuous effect B start process (see FIG. 43) described later or a continuous effect C start process (see FIG. 44) described later, the continuous effect B start is started. Return to the process and the continuous production C start process.

  According to the stop symbol replacement process (S1902) of FIG. 42 described above, when the stop symbol of the variation effect is set to other than the chance eye, the stop symbol can be changed to the chance symbol, while the change effect of the variation effect is changed. If the chance symbol is set for the stop symbol by chance, the process of changing the stop symbol to the chance symbol can be skipped. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution (number of times) of the unnecessary process of setting the stop symbol set as the chance to the chance again, the control burden can be reduced.

  Further, after the change effect stop symbol is changed to the chance, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i can be set to OFF by the processing of S2012, so that the change effect stop symbol can be prevented from being changed again. . As described above (see FIG. 35), when the stop symbol is accidentally set to “chance eye” by the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 45) even though the continuous chance eye effect is not executed. In order to change the stop symbol to an off symbol other than “chance eye”, the chance chance prohibiting process (S1113) is executed. However, since the chance chance prohibition process (S1113) is skipped when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is off, the chance chance prohibition process is executed, and the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is displayed. There will be no change to a stop symbol other than “chance”. Therefore, the continuous effect A can be reliably executed as the continuous chance effect.

  Further, in the processing of S2011, only the stop symbol data of the part changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced among the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Therefore, the stop symbol data of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 that are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in which the low speed fluctuation (or medium speed fluctuation) is started. Without affecting the stop symbol data, it is possible to replace (change) only the stop symbol data of the non-stop-displayed symbol strings Z1, Z2, and Z3. Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed while accurately stopping and displaying the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol (third symbol), only the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced to minimize the change of the third symbol row. The stop symbol has been changed to a chance. Therefore, since the process for replacing the third symbol is reduced as compared with the case where the third symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced, the control burden can be reduced.

  Further, when replacing the third symbol, it is only necessary to change the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b, so that the stop symbol can be easily changed. For example, when data for performing a variation effect for one time is not distinguished between variation effect data and stop symbol data, but is simply stored in the video RAM 276 as one piece of data (referred to as “integrated effect data”). First, the data portion corresponding to the stop symbol data must be specified from the integrated effect data, and then the third symbol data that needs to be changed must be changed. However, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to change the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b, so that the stop symbol can be easily changed.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, only the 3rd symbol of symbol sequence Z1-Z3 in high-speed fluctuation | variation is replaced by this stop symbol replacement process. This is because while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the scroll rate of the third symbol is generally high and the player cannot recognize the third symbols constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (or This is because the replacement of the third symbols constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be performed without notifying the player. Therefore, when the third symbol is replaced, it is possible to prevent an unnatural fluctuation effect from being executed for the player. Therefore, since the stop symbol can be changed without making the player feel uncomfortable, the value of the fluctuating effect can be improved, and the value of the continuous chance eye effect can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, if there is the same symbol (third symbol) in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, only the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, and the stop symbol is regarded as a chance. However, the stop symbol may be changed to the chance by replacing the third symbol row Z3 and the third symbol row Z2 respectively. In addition, when the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are all changing at high speed, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol (main symbol) regardless of whether or not the same symbol (main symbol) exists. The third symbols in the middle and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be replaced and changed to “chance eyes”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, replacement of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol will be described. Here, as an example, a case will be described in which a stop symbol constituting a “completely missed symbol” is replaced with a stop symbol constituting a “miss chance”.

  FIG. 49 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273l before the third symbol is replaced (before the change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the contents. b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273l after replacing (changing) the third symbol and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 49A, “11” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273l, “11” is stored in the second area, and “4” is stored in the third area. Suppose that In this state, when a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, “shell”, “shark (4)”, “shell” are sequentially displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 from left to right. "Is displayed.

  Similarly, the middle symbol row Z2 includes a symbol row arranged in order from left to right, “Angkou (6)”, “shellfish”, “Dugong (7)”, and the lower symbol row Z3 includes a left symbol row. In order from the right to the right, a symbol row along with “shellfish”, “turtle (3)”, and “shellfish” is displayed. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate stop symbols of “completely missed symbols” displayed in the run-off variation.

  As described above, when there is no same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol, the medium speed fluctuation of the lower symbol row Z3 is started regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the variation effect being executed. The stop symbol can be changed until before (less than 9 seconds). Here, in order to change the stop symbol, one third symbol (main symbol) must be selected from the upper symbol row Z1, but there is only “shark” in this stop symbol. Therefore, in this case, the third symbols of the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced so that “shark” enters the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, respectively.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row lined up with "turtle (3)", "shell", and "shark (4)" in order from left to right. Further, the lower symbol row Z3 is replaced with a symbol row lined up with "turtle (3)", "shellfish", and "shark (4)" in order from left to right.

  When the symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are replaced in this way, the symbol “shark” is displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3. Since it enters, the stop symbol becomes the “miss chance”.

  Then, when the stop symbol can be changed to “the chance to miss”, the array number “5” indicating the changed middle symbol row Z2 is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273l, and the lower symbol row after the change is stored. The array element number “5” indicating Z3 is stored in the third area of the display symbol pattern memory 273l. As a result, “disappearance chance” is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect being executed.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol is replaced so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3 so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2. You can go. Also, for example, when there are two main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row are set so that the stop symbol becomes the “off chance eye” by any one of the main symbols. What is necessary is just to change the symbol row Z3.

  In the above example, among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 has been replaced. The third symbols of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be replaced.

  Further, in the above example, the case where the stop symbol constituting the “completely missed symbol” is replaced with the stop symbol constituting the “missing chance eye” is described, but the “rear and forward missed reach symbol” is configured. When the stop symbol is replaced with the stop symbol that constitutes the “reach chance eye”, or when the stop symbol that constitutes the “reach symbol other than forward / backward deviation” is replaced with the stop symbol that constitutes the “reach chance eye” Similarly, the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 and the third symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 may be replaced. In addition, since the same symbol is always present in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in the “front / rear out of reach design” and the “reach symbol other than front / rear out”, even if only the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced. good. Further, the third symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be replaced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the continuous effect B start process (S1807) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the secondary effect B start process (S1807) of the effect control device 117. The continuous effect B start process (S1807) is a process for starting the continuous effect B (see FIG. 8) as a continuous chance eye effect, and is a process executed in the continuous effect start determination process (see FIG. 40). is there.

  In this continuous effect B start processing (S1807), first, the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e in the RAM 273 (number of special figure B reserved balls NB) is 2, and the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on. It is determined whether or not there is (S1931). Note that, as described above, the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e is a counter that counts the number of winnings held for the first entrance B640, that is, the number of special figure B held balls NB, and a stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is a flag that is turned on only within a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed.

  In the process of S1931, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 2 and the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on (S1931: Yes), This is a case in which a continuous effect B (continuous chance effect) is executed by adding the variable effect being executed to the reserve of the variable effect that is executed in response to a winning at one entrance B640.

  In this case, first, a stop symbol replacement process is executed (S1902). The stop symbol replacement process is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to “chance” as described above with reference to FIG. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed, the third symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that is changing at high speed is replaced, and the stop symbol becomes “chance eye”. Be changed.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1902) ends, the set value stored in the set value storage area 273c1 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is then changed to “set value: chance” (S1932). Next, in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, the holding area where the previous (one time before) winning data (setting value and variation time) is stored, and the current winning data are stored. The set value of each set value storage area 273c1 in the reserved area is changed to “set value: chance” (S1933). As a result, the stop symbol of the variation effect can be made the “chance” three times in succession. And this continuous production | generation B start process is complete | finished, and it returns to a continuous production start determination process (refer FIG. 40).

  In the process of S1931, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is other than 2 or the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is off (S1931: No), This is a case in which a continuous chance eye effect is executed only by holding the variable effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640.

  In this case, in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, the holding area in which the data of the current winning is stored and the previous winning data (set value and variation time) are stored. The set value of each set value storage area 273c1 in the stored reserved area and the reserved area in which the data of the winning two times before (two times before) is stored is changed to “set value: chance” (S1934). ). As a result, the stop symbol of the variation effect can be made the “chance” three times in succession. And this continuous production | generation B start process is complete | finished, and it returns to a continuous production start determination process (refer FIG. 40).

  According to the continuous effect B start processing (S1807) of FIG. 43 described above, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed and the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage are performed so that the continuous effect B (continuous chance eye effect) is executed. The set value in the area 273b can be changed.

  In addition to the continuous production A and the continuous production C, the continuous production B can also be executed, so that the chances of executing the continuous chance eye production can be increased and the chances of displaying the “chance eyes” can be increased. . On the other hand, when the continuous effect A, the continuous effect B, and the continuous effect C are not executed, the display of “chance eyes” is prohibited. Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to increase the chances of impressing the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted by the continuous chance eye effect. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the continuous effect C start process (S1809) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the follow-up effect C start processing (S1809) of the effect control device 117. The continuous effect C start process (S1809) is a process for starting the continuous effect C (see FIG. 8) as a continuous chance eye effect, and is a process executed in the continuous effect start determination process (see FIG. 40). is there.

  In the continuous effect C start process (S1809), first, the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e in the RAM 273 (number of special figure B reserved balls NB) is 1, and the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on. It is determined whether or not there is (S1951). Note that, as described above, the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e is a counter that counts the number of winnings held for the first entrance B640, that is, the number of special figure B held balls NB, and a stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is a flag that is turned on only within a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed.

  In the process of S1951, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 1 and the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is on (S1951: Yes), This is a case where the continuous effect C (continuous chance effect) is executed by adding the variable effect being executed to the reserve of the variable effect that is executed in response to winning at the 1 entrance B640.

  In this case, first, a stop symbol replacement process is executed (S1902). The stop symbol replacement process is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to “chance” as described above with reference to FIG. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed, the third symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that is changing at high speed is replaced, and the stop symbol becomes “chance eye”. Be changed.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1902) is completed, the set value stored in the set value storage area 273c1 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is changed to “set value: chance” (S1953). In the continuous effect C, the set value of the holding area in which the data of the current winning prize is stored is not changed. Thereby, the stop symbol of the first variation effect can be set to “chance”, and the stop symbol of the second variation effect can be set to “probability big hit symbol”, “normal jackpot symbol”, or “outage symbol”. And this continuous production | generation B start process is complete | finished, and it returns to a continuous production start determination process (refer FIG. 40).

  In the process of S1951, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is other than 1 or the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is off (S1931: No), This is a case in which a continuous chance eye effect is executed only by holding the variable effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640.

  In this case, the setting value storage area 273c1 is set in the holding area in which the previous winning data (setting value and variation time) are stored in the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. The value is changed to “setting value: chance” (S1954). In the continuous effect C, the set value of the holding area in which the data of the current winning prize is stored is not changed. Thereby, the stop symbol of the first variation effect can be set to “chance”, and the stop symbol of the second variation effect can be set to “probability big hit symbol”, “normal jackpot symbol”, or “outage symbol”. And this continuous production C start process is complete | finished, and it returns to a continuous production start determination process (refer FIG. 40).

  According to the continuous effect C start process (S1809) in FIG. 44 described above, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed and the special figure B stop symbol instruction store so that the continuous effect C (continuous chance eye effect) is executed. The set value in the area 273b can be changed.

  In addition to the continuous production A and the continuous production B, the continuous production C can also be executed, so that the chances of executing the continuous chance eye production can be increased and the chances of displaying the “chance eyes” can be increased. . On the other hand, when the continuous effect A, the continuous effect B, and the continuous effect C are not executed, the display of “chance eyes” is prohibited. Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to increase the chances of impressing the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted by the continuous chance eye effect. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the variable effect setting process (S1604) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the variation effect setting process (S1604) of the effect control device 117. The variation effect setting process (S1604) is a process for setting the variation effect data necessary for starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and every time a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command are received. It is a process to be executed. This process is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 38) described above.

  In this variation effect setting process (S1604), first, the variation start flag 273h of the RAM 273 is set to ON, and the stop symbol set flag 273j is set to OFF (S2101). As described above, the variation start flag 273h is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. The stop symbol set flag 273j is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the variation effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command and effect time addition command and stored in the fluctuation time memory 273f (S2102). As described above, since the variation pattern command is a command corresponding to the variation time of the variation effect to be executed, it is also a command indicating the variation time of the variation effect. The effect time addition command is a command indicating the extension time or shortening time of the variable effect to be executed. Then, variation effect data corresponding to the variation time stored in the variation time memory 273f is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S2103), and the acquired variation effect data is stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S2104). ).

  Next, stop symbol instruction storage area forward processing is executed (S2105). Note that the stop symbol instruction storage area forward process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, but the data used for setting the stop symbol of the variable effect is the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special symbol B stop. This is a process for shifting from the symbol instruction storage area 273b to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c.

  When the stop symbol instruction storage area sequential forwarding process (S2105) is completed, the set value stored in the set value storage area 273c1 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is acquired (S2106). It is determined whether or not “setting value: off” (S2107). When the acquired setting value is other than “setting value: out” (S2107: No), it is a case where the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed is not changed. In other words, when the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is “probable big hit symbol”, “normal jackpot symbol”, or “chance”, the stop symbol is not changed to “chance”. Therefore, in this case, the variation effect setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38). Note that when the outlier long fluctuation is executed, the set value to be acquired is “probability big hit symbol”, so that the process branches to S2107: No, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is not turned on, and S2108 described later. Is skipped.

  In the process of S2107, if the acquired setting value is “setting value: out” (S2107: Yes), the stop symbol may be changed, so the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i is set to ON. (S2108), the variation effect setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  45, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273i can be set to ON only when the execution of the variation effect in which the stop symbol becomes “out of symbol” is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the stop symbol from being erroneously changed, even though the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is not changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the stop symbol instruction | indication storage area sequential forwarding process (S2105) performed by MPU271 in the effect control apparatus 117 is demonstrated. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol instruction storage area forward processing (S2105) of the effect control device 117. In the stop symbol instruction storage area forward process (S2105), stop symbol instruction execution is performed from the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a or the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. This is a process for shifting to the area 273c. This stop symbol instruction storing area forward process is a process executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 45), and is executed every time a new variation effect is started.

  In the stop symbol instruction storing area forward processing (S2105), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is larger than 0 (S2201). In the process of S2201, when the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 0 (S2201: No), only the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a corresponds to winning. Since the data (set value and fluctuation time) is stored (held), each data stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a is stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. (S2206).

  Specifically, the data stored in the set value storage area 273a1 of the hold first area is shifted to the set value storage area 273c1 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. Similarly, the data stored in the variable time storage area 273a2 is shifted to the variable time storage area 273c2.

  Then, the bit value “0” which is the start opening winning information is stored in the starting opening winning information storage area 273c3 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c (S2207). As described above, if the data stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is based on winning in the first entrance A64, the bit value “0” is stored in the starting entrance winning information storage area 273c3, and the first If the winning is based on winning in the 1 entrance B 640, the bit value “1” is stored in the starting entrance winning information storage area 273c3. Here, since the data corresponding to winning in the first winning slot A64 is stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, the bit value “0” is stored in the starting slot winning information storage area 273c3.

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storing area 273a is shifted to an area having a smaller area number (first to third areas), respectively ( S2208).

  In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden is reduced. be able to. Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a holding | maintenance area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 272 can be increased.

  Then, the value of the special figure A reserved ball counter 273d (the special figure A reserved ball number NA) is decremented by 1 (S2209), and the stop symbol instruction storing area forward process is terminated, and the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 45). Return to.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is 1 or more in the processing of S2201 (S2201: Yes), the first holding of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b is performed. Each data stored in the area is shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c (S2202).

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured to preferentially perform the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance B640 rather than the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance A64. Therefore, the variation effect stop symbol executed in response to the winning at the first entrance B640 is set rather than the change effect stop symbol executed in response to the winning at the first entrance A64. Settings must be prioritized. Therefore, the determination of S2201 is performed, and the data corresponding to the winning at the first entrance B640 is preferentially shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, and the variation effect based on the winning at the first entrance B640 is performed. The stop symbol is set with priority. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result (stop symbol) based on the winning at the first entrance B640 can be preferentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2202, specifically, the data stored in the set value storage area 273b1 of the hold first area is shifted to the set value storage area 273c1 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. Similarly, the data stored in the variable time storage area 273b2 is shifted to the variable time storage area 273c2.

  Then, the bit value “1” which is the start opening winning information is stored in the starting opening winning information storage area 273c3 of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c (S2203). Here, since the data corresponding to the winning at the first winning slot B640 is stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, the bit value “1” is stored in the starting slot winning information storage area 273c3. Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to the area (first to third area) having a smaller area number (S2204).

  In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held), but the reserved areas (second to second) regardless of the presence or absence of data. You may comprise so that each data of 4) may each be shifted to the area where an area number is 1 smaller.

  Then, the value of the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e (special figure B reserved ball number NB) is decremented by 1 (S2205), the stop symbol instruction storing area forward process is terminated, and the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 45). Return to.

  According to the stop symbol instruction storing area forward process (S2105) of FIG. 46, the determination process of S2201 allows the special symbol B stop rather than the data stored in the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storing area 273a. The data stored in the symbol instruction storage area 273b can be preferentially shifted to the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result (stop symbol) based on the winning at the first entrance B640 can be preferentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first entrance B640 is preferentially performed, so that the jackpot based on the winning at the first entrance B640 is adapted to the lottery. The lottery result (stop symbol) can be preferentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the stop symbol setting process (S1606) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol setting process (S1606) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol setting process (S1606) is a process for setting a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or starts to be executed, and is executed every time a stop symbol command is received. It is processing. Further, it is a process executed in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  In the stop symbol setting process (S1606), first, each data (set value, variation time, start opening prize information) stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is acquired (S2301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance” (S2302). If the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance” (S2302: Yes), the obtained fluctuation is determined. It is determined whether the time corresponds to the “out-of-range fluctuation” (S2303). Specifically, it is determined whether the rough variation time of the symbol variation is “11 seconds”. As described above, the set value is any one of “out of”, “probability big hit”, and “normal big hit”, and the start opening prize information includes the bit value “0” and the bit value. One of “1”.

  In the process of S2303, when the obtained variation time is a time corresponding to “out-of-range variation” (S2303: Yes), the third symbol arrangement information constituting the “out chance chance” is created as a stop symbol ( S2304) and the process proceeds to S2308. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, if the acquired fluctuation time is not the time corresponding to “out-of-range fluctuation” (S2303: No), the third symbol arrangement information constituting “reach chance eyes” is created as a stop symbol. (S2305), the process proceeds to S2308.

  On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is other than “setting value: chance” in the processing of S2302, it is a case where the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command may be set as it is. In this case, a stop symbol pattern is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2306). From the stop symbol command, the stop symbol pattern is one of the following symbols: “rear-rear reach design”, “reach other than front-rear reach”, “completely defeat symbol”, “probability big hit symbol”, or “normal jackpot symbol”. Are extracted.

  Next, out of each area in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 18A), the third symbol arrangement information is acquired from the area corresponding to the extracted stop symbol pattern (S2307). Transition to processing.

  In the processing of S2308, the third symbol arrangement information created in the processing of S2304 and S2305 or the third symbol arrangement information acquired in the processing of S2307 is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273l of the RAM 273 (S2308).

  Then, stop symbol data (image data of the third symbol) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information of the display symbol pattern memory 273l is acquired from the character ROM 275, and the stop symbol data of the video RAM 276 is acquired. The data is stored in the storage area 276b (S2309). Thereby, stop symbol data which is image data of a stop symbol displayed in the variation effect is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  Then, the stop symbol set flag 273j of the RAM 273 is set to ON (S2310), the stop symbol setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  When the stop symbol command is received by the stop symbol setting process (S1606) of FIG. 47 described above, each data (set value, variation time, start opening prize information) stored in the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c, Based on the stop symbol pattern indicated by the received stop symbol command, it is possible to set a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or that is to be started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, normally, the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being executed or starts to be executed is set based on the received stop symbol command, but the stop symbol is set to the chance. In this case, regardless of the content of the received stop symbol command, it is set based on each data (set value, variation time, start opening prize information) of the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c. In other words, every time a stop symbol command is received, whether the continuous chance eye effect is being executed, which continuous effect is being executed among the continuous effects A to C, and the continuous chance eye effect is started. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the stop symbol as a chance by determining whether or not the stop symbol of the current variation effect is seen as a chance based on the situation such as how many times the variable effect is executed. Therefore, the control burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the stop symbol instruction execution area 273c is provided, but this is stopped, and a flag indicating whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is being executed, A status indicating whether or not a continuous effect is being executed, a counter that counts the number of fluctuation effects that have been executed since the start of a continuous chance effect, and the like, the flag described above each time a stop symbol command is received, An appropriate stop symbol may be set by making a determination to determine the stop symbol of the current variation effect based on the status, content of the counter, and the like.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to the “chance eye”, and furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol during the fluctuating production can be changed to “chance” during the fluctuating production. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Can display “opportunity”. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved.

  Also, if the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect is accidentally set to “chance eye” even though the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, the stop symbol is changed to an off symbol other than “chance eye”. it can. Therefore, since the “chance eyes” can be displayed only when the continuous chance eye effect is executed, it is easy for the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed when the “chance eye” is displayed. Can be recognized. Further, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to impress the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed. Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation of an advantageous gaming state, and at the same time, the game will be performed in accordance with the variation effect to be executed and the number of continuous display of the “chance eye”. Can attract the interest of the people. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, in order to prevent the player's ball driving method from changing depending on whether or not the player has knowledge such as the characteristics of the gaming machine 10 (that is, the player In order to prevent a difference in the game value given to the player), only when a winning (winning) to the first entrance B640 is detected, based on the lottery result of the winning, Although it is determined whether or not the performance is to be executed, instead of this, only when a winning (entry) to the first entrance A64 is detected, it is continuously based on the lottery result of the winning. It may be determined whether or not to execute the chance eye effect. Further, even when a winning (entrance) to the first entrance A64 is detected or a winning (entrance) to the second entrance B640 is detected, it is based on the respective lottery results. It may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous chance eye effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect can be executed only with the pending change effect executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640. Only the pending portion of the variation effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640 is used to execute the continuous chance effect, while the number of reservations is insufficient, and the continuous chance effect is executed. If it is not possible, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect can be executed by adding the variable effect being executed to the reserve of the variable effect that is executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640. If it can be executed, the variation effect being executed and the pending portion of the variation effect executed in response to the winning at the first entrance B640 are used to execute the continuous chance effect. Instead, if the number of holdings is insufficient and the continuous chance eye effect cannot be performed, the first winning game will be included in the variable effect to be executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640. It may be determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect can be executed by adding a reserve of the variable effect executed in accordance with the winning at the ball outlet A64. If it is determined in the determination that it can be executed, it is executed in accordance with the hold of the variable effect executed in response to the winning at the first entrance B640 and the winning at the first entrance A64. A continuous chance eye effect is executed using the reserved variable effect. If the continuous chance effect cannot be executed even if the variation effect being executed is added, the continuous chance effect is not executed. As a result, it is executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance A64 as compared with the case where the continuous chance is executed only by the reserved portion of the variation effect executed in accordance with the winning at the first entrance B640. The amount of opportunity for performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased by the amount that the pending portion of the variable effect can be added to a part of the continuous chance eye effect. Therefore, a player's expectation can be improved. Moreover, since the opportunity which can perform a continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the opportunity where a "chance eye" is displayed can be increased. On the other hand, when the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, the display of “chance eye” is prohibited. Therefore, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to increase the chances of impressing the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted by the continuous chance eye effect. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect. In addition, if the continuous chance eye effect cannot be executed, the variable effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640 is executed according to the winning at the first entrance A64. It may be determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect can be executed by adding the pending change effect and the change effect being executed. In this case, according to the winning at the first entrance A64 as compared to the case where the continuous chance eyes are executed only by the reserved portion of the variation effect executed according to the winning at the first entrance B640. Further, the number of opportunities for performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased by adding the pending portion of the variable effect to be executed and the variable effect being executed to a part of the continuous chance eye effect. Accordingly, the player's expectation can be further improved. Further, since the chances of executing the continuous chance eye effect can be further increased, the chances of displaying the “chance eye” can be further increased. On the other hand, when the continuous chance eye effect is not executed, the display of “chance eye” is prohibited. Therefore, when “Chance Eye” is displayed, it is possible to further increase the chances of impressing the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed, so that the player's interest is further attracted to the continuous chance eye effect. Can do. Accordingly, it is possible to further increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, as a continuous chance eye effect, as shown in FIG. 8, the three effects of the continuous effect A, the continuous effect B, and the continuous effect C are provided, but these are examples. The types of continuous production may be increased or decreased. In addition, the number of continuous display of chances and the number of executions of variation effects in each of the continuous effects A to C are examples, and the number of continuous display of chances and the number of executions of variation effects may be increased or decreased. good. Moreover, you may comprise a continuous chance eye effect so that the chance eye is displayed intermittently.

  In the above embodiment, if the normal reach variation, the same main symbol is always included in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Furthermore, even if the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display is long (10 seconds). Therefore, even when the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at medium speed or low speed, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, and the stop symbol of the deviation variation is changed from “front / rear out of reach reach symbol” to “reach chance”, or It may be changed from “reach pattern other than front / rear miss” to “reach chance”. Thereby, even after the medium symbol row Z2 is switched to the medium speed fluctuation or the low speed fluctuation, the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect can be changed to “reaching chance”, so that the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed (for example, Only in less than 10 seconds), it is possible to further increase the chance of performing the continuous chance effect as long as the changeable period can be secured, rather than changing the stop symbol during the variation effect to “reach chance eye”. For example, if it is less than 5 seconds after the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (after 10 seconds), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed. That is, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is 15 seconds. In this case, in addition to the period in which all of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to medium speed after the upper symbol row Z1 has changed to medium speed. The period before the change and the period until the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the middle symbol row Z2 changes to the medium speed change become the changeable period. Here, the reason why the time is less than 5 seconds is to make sure that the stop symbol is changed. Depending on the content of the control process (for example, when the control burden is small), the maximum changeable period is set. It may be close to 20 seconds. In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured for a long time, opportunities for performing the continuous chance effect can be further increased. Further, as in the case of outlier fluctuation, it is also possible to change the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect to a stop symbol other than the “reach chance”. For example, when the stop symbol during the variation production is accidentally set to “reach chance”, at least the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed) to stop the normal reach variation stop symbol. Can be changed to “rear out of front / rear reach design” or “reach design other than out of front / rear out”. As a result, “chance eye” is displayed only when the continuous chance eye effect is executed. Therefore, when “chance eye” is displayed, the player's expectation for an advantageous gaming state is improved. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest and increase the value of the direct chance eye effect. Further, when the “chance eye” is displayed, it is possible to impress the player that the continuous chance eye effect is executed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, it is comprised so that the 3rd symbol of each symbol row | line | column Z1, Z2, Z3 may be scroll-displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the arrangement | sequence order of the 3rd symbol defined with the virtual symbol reel. Has been. For example, if a change in the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed after the middle symbol row Z2 is switched to the middle speed variation when the deviation variation is executed, the remaining effect time is short (1 second), so the stop display It is difficult to scroll-display each 3rd symbol up to the 3rd symbol (stop symbol) to be displayed, and a desired stop symbol may not be displayed. However, if it is a normal reach variation, even if the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed after the middle symbol row Z2 is switched to the medium speed variation, the remaining production time is long (10 seconds), so the medium symbol variation is changed. For example, if it is less than 5 seconds after switching, the third symbols up to the third symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped can be scroll-displayed, and the desired stop symbol can be displayed reliably. In other words, by changing the stop symbol only when the third symbol (stop symbol) that should be stopped can be displayed reliably, such as normal reach fluctuation, it is related to the variation pattern of the variable effect being executed. As a result, the control burden can be reduced as compared with the case of trying to change the stop symbol. In addition, you may comprise so that the change of a stop symbol may be tried irrespective of the variation pattern of the variation production in execution. In the case of super reach fluctuation and special reach, as in the case of normal reach fluctuation, even if the medium symbol row Z2 is switched to medium speed fluctuation, the time until the stop display is long, so the middle symbol row Z2 becomes medium speed fluctuation. Even after switching, change the 3rd symbol (stop symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 to change the stop symbol from “rear and front reach reach symbol” to “reach chance” or “reach symbol other than front and rear miss” It can be changed to “Reach Chance”. Similarly to the case of normal reach fluctuation, the “reach chance” can be changed to “reach out of front / rear reach” or “reach out of front / rear out”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display of the horizontal scroll is executed in the third symbol display device 81, some of the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stopped symbol are displayed. Even after the symbol row (upper symbol row Z1 or lower symbol row Z3) is stopped and displayed, the third symbol of the symbol row that is changing at high speed is replaced, and the stop symbol that is changing is changed to “chance”. However, after all of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbols of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be replaced so that the stopped symbols become “chance eyes”. For example, as soon as all the stopped symbols are displayed, an effect of exchanging all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be performed, or an effect of exchanging only some of the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be performed. With this configuration, even after the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the stop symbol can be changed, so that the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period) can be ensured the longest. Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the chance of performing the continuous chance effect. The same applies to the case where the vertical scroll variable display is executed.

  In the above embodiment, the variation effect data used for the variation effect and the stop symbol data used for the display of the stop symbol are stored separately, and the symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 of the stop symbol is “chance”. The stop symbol data is changed so that it becomes “eye”, and each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is scroll-displayed (changed) so that the stop symbol is stopped and displayed, but the stop symbol data is stored. Instead, the remaining time until the stop symbol is displayed is acquired, and when the remaining time elapses, the symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is scrolled so that it stops at the “chance” (changes). You may comprise so that symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 may be changed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display is horizontally scrolled in the third symbol display device 81, the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are configured to be displayed. The number of symbol columns is not limited to three, but may be one or two, or four or more.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the continuous chance effect is executed, the variation effect in which the stop symbol becomes “chance” is continuously executed, but the stop symbol is “chance”. An effect that is executed intermittently (for example, every other time) may be performed as a continuous chance effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the determination whether to perform a continuous chance eye effect is performed in the effect control apparatus 117, it is determined whether the main control apparatus 110 performs a continuous chance eye effect instead. It is good also as a structure which performs determination. In the main control device 110, when it is determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is performed, the transmission / reception of the winning information command is unnecessary, so the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117 The number of command receptions can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce both the control burdens of the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, whenever the winning control information command is received in the production | presentation control apparatus 117, the setting value according to the lottery result contained in the received winning information command is stored in the special figure A stop symbol instruction | indication Although it is configured to store in the area 273a and the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, it may be configured to store a lottery result.

  Further, in the above embodiment, every time the winning information command is received in the effect control device 117, the fluctuation time included in the received winning information command is changed to the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a. FIG. B is configured so as to be stored in the stop symbol instruction storage area 273b, but is configured so that a variation pattern is included in the winning information command instead of the variation time, and the variation pattern is designated as the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area. 273a and special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b may be stored.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the variation time of the variation effect to be executed is stored in the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. Then, it may be configured to set (acquire) the variation effect data of the variation effect to be executed. In this case, since transmission / reception of the variation pattern command is unnecessary, the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the number of command receptions in the effect control device 117 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce both the control burdens of the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the sound effect during the change effect (the sound effect mode of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third symbol), or the sound effect when the stop symbol is stopped (the sound effect mode of the stop display) May be changed to a sound effect different from that during normal fluctuation production. This sound effect allows the player to recognize that the continuous chance stage production is being performed, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game. Further, after setting the stop symbol as “chance eye”, the sound effect during the dynamic effect (the mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third symbol, etc.) and the stop symbol are stopped and displayed. The sound effect in this case (the mode of the sound effect of the stop display) may be changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal variation effect.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the illumination parts 29 to 33 during the change effect, the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (the aspect of the dynamic display effect), the illumination parts 29 to 33 when the stop symbol is stopped, and the display lamp You may change 34 lighting patterns (the aspect of the production | presentation of a stop display) into a pattern different from the normal fluctuation production. Since the player can recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced by the lighting pattern different from the normal, it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game. In addition to the “stop chance” as the stop symbol, the lighting parts 29 to 33 during the variation effect, the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (dynamic display effect), and the stop symbol are also displayed as stop. The lighting parts 29 to 33 and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (the aspect of the stop display effect) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal variation effect.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above embodiment, a variable effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”. It is also possible to perform various fluctuation effects continuously. For example, the same variation effect (the aspect of the dynamic display effect is the same) may be performed continuously, or different variation effects may be performed successively in a predetermined order. In addition, for example, the same stop symbols (the same display mode of stop display) may be stopped and displayed continuously, or different stop symbols may be continuously stopped and displayed in a predetermined order. By this special variation effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance effect is being produced, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the continuous chance effect production of the above embodiment, a variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye (missing chance eye, reach chance eye)” is continuously performed. Sound (dynamic display sound effect mode, for example, the stop sound of the 3rd pattern, etc.) and the sound effect when stopping the display of the stop pattern (stop display sound effect mode) Is changed to a different sound effect, or the lighting parts 29 to 33 during the dynamic production, the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (mode of dynamic display), or the lighting parts 29 to 33 when the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (the mode of the stop display effect) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal change effect, or a special change effect different from the normal effect may be continuously performed. Moreover, you may carry out combining each two or more.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the stop symbol in which three same 3 symbols are stopped-displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is set as the "off chance chance", three predetermined 3rd symbols ( For example, a stop symbol in which symbols such as “3”, “4”, and “1”) are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set as the “off chance chance”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, control of audio output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of variation effect (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although it is configured to be performed by the production control device 117, various controls may be performed by being shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the voice lamp control device controls the sound output and the lighting and extinction of various lamps, and controls the control of the third symbol variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. You may comprise so that it may be performed with an apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, the first entrance A64 and the first entrance B640 are provided as entrances where the jackpot determination is started. One mouth may be sufficient and three or more may be sufficient. Then, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, the effect mode of the continuous chance eye effect is changed according to the first entrance where the game ball has won (for example, the effect scroll direction (vertical and horizontal)). May be changed).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear, complete out, etc.) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is a combination of the values of the counters C1 to C2, CS1 to CS3. However, it may be determined based on a combination of some counter values among the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 to CS3. Further, a counter for determining the fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the determination may be made based on the counter value.

  In the first embodiment, the first random number counter C1 counts numerical values in the range of 0 to 2309, but the counting range may be appropriately determined. Here, in order to count a numerical value in the range of 0 to 2309, an area of at least 2 bytes (a range that can be counted by 2 bytes is 0 to 65535) is required. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is composed of 2 bytes, a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 that is the maximum range that can be counted by 2 bytes may be counted, or 0 to 32768 (the most significant bit) Only a bit value of “1” and other bits may be counted in the range of bit value “0”).

  Similarly, the first hit type counter C2 in the above embodiment counts numerical values in the range of 0 to 19, but the counting range may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count a numerical value in the range of 0 to 19, an area of at least 1 byte is required (the range that can be counted by 1 byte is 0 to 255). For example, if the first hit type counter C2 is composed of 1 byte, a numerical value in the range of 0 to 255 which is the maximum range that can be counted by 1 byte may be counted, or 0 to 128 (the most significant bit) Only a bit value of “1” and other bits may be counted in the range of bit value “0”).

  Here, when the probability is calculated using the maximum value of the range to be counted as the denominator and the one count value as the numerator, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to provide various probabilities. For example, if the denominator is 100, the probability can be set only for every 1%, but if the denominator is 1000, the probability can be set for every 0.1%. That is, the wider the counting range, the easier the fine adjustment of the probability. In pachinko machines, it is common to produce models with the same variation effect and jackpot effect but different jackpot probabilities, so by configuring the pachinko machine so that you can easily fine-tune the probability, Fine adjustment of the jackpot probability can be easily made for each model, and the design burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although comprised so that the pending | holding number command may be transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the production | presentation control apparatus 117, you may comprise so that a pending | holding number command may not be transmitted. That is, the effect control device 117 stores the special figure A reserved ball number NA in the special figure A reserved ball counter 273d of the RAM 273, and stores the special figure B reserved ball number NB in the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e. Thus, the special figure A reserved ball number NA and the special figure B reserved ball number NB can be known without receiving the hold number command. That is, in this case, the same number of lamps as the value of the special figure A holding ball counter 273d are lit in the special figure A holding ball counter 85A, and the same number as the value of the special figure B holding ball counter 273e. The lamp is configured to be turned on at the special figure B holding lamp 85B. As a result, the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the number of command receptions in the effect control device 117 can be reduced, thereby reducing both the control burden on the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117. Can do.

  In the above embodiment, the “calculation time addition command” is provided, but the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like that is not provided with the “calculation time addition command”.

  In the embodiment described above, the main control device 110 determines the changing effect and the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 A fluctuating effect or a notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. For example, when receiving the winning information command, the effect control device 117 receives the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the special symbol A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a and the special symbol B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b. The change effect and the notice effect to be displayed are determined. When the effect control device 117 determines the changing effect or the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special figure A hold lamp 85A displays the number of holds for the first entrance A64. You may or may not do. Similarly, the special figure B hold lamp 85B may or may not display the number of holds for the first entrance B640. In the case where the hold number is not displayed, the number of transmissions of the hold number command in the main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the special figure A reserved ball number NA is notified by lighting the special figure A hold lamp 85A, and the special figure B reserved ball number NB is notified by lighting the special figure B hold lamp 85B. The special figure A holding lamp number 85A may be omitted, and the special figure A holding ball number NA may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the special figure B holding lamp 85B may be provided without displaying the special figure B holding ball number NB on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the display is performed so that the number of holdings is visually distinguishable (for example, a number or a four-divided area is displayed as a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) that is different by the number of holdings). To do. Further, the special figure A reserved ball number NA may be notified by turning on the special figure A hold lamp 85A, and the special figure A reserved ball number NA may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the special figure B reserved ball number NB may be notified by turning on the special figure B hold lamp 85B, and the special figure B reserved ball number NB may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it comprised so that the winning (entrance) to 1st entrance A64 could be held | maintained 4 times at maximum, the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, 3 It may be set to the number of times or less, or the number of times of 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Similarly, the winning (entry) to the first entrance B640 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 5 You may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) more than times.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure A holding ball counter 203d is provided as a counter for counting the special figure A holding ball number NA of the first entrance A64. However, the counter 203d is not provided and is necessary. Depending on the situation (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the contents of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203a are confirmed (the number of areas with data is counted), whereby the special figure A hold of the first entrance A64 is reserved. You may comprise so that ball number NA may be obtained. In this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area. Similarly, the special figure B holding ball counter 203e is provided as a counter for counting the special figure B holding ball number NB of the first entrance B640. However, the counter 203e is not provided and the counter 203e is provided as necessary (for example, At the start of the fluctuation), the content of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed (the number of areas with data is counted) to obtain the special figure B reserved ball number NB of the first entrance B640. You may comprise as follows. Also in this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure A reserved ball counter 273d is provided as a counter for counting the special figure A reserved ball number NA of the first entrance A64. However, the counter 273d is not provided. In response to (for example, when a winning information command is received), the contents of the special figure A stop symbol instruction storage area 273a are confirmed (the number of areas with data is counted), thereby You may comprise so that special figure A reservation ball number NA may be obtained. In this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area. Similarly, the special figure B reserved ball counter 273e is provided as a counter for counting the special figure B reserved ball number NB of the first entrance B640. However, the counter 273e is not provided, and the counter 273e is provided as necessary (for example, When the winning information command is received), the contents of the special figure B stop symbol instruction storage area 273b are confirmed (by counting the number of areas with data), and the special figure B holding ball of the first entrance B640 is obtained. You may comprise so that several NB may be obtained. Also in this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L shape. Moreover, you may scroll diagonally. Further, it may be scrolled immediately before. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to 4 times, and it is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information is specific, and in this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown. Display means for displaying identification information, a first entrance into which a game medium enters, first detection means for detecting entry of a game medium into the first entrance, and the first entrance And a second entrance for entering the game medium and second detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the second entrance, the first detection means or the second In the gaming machine that executes dynamic display of identification information on the display means when the detection means detects the entry of the game medium, the first detection means or the second detection means detects the entry of the game medium. In this case, the entry information acquisition means for acquiring the entry information associated with the entry, the entry information storage means for storing the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means, and the entry information storage When executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the contents of the means The dynamic display executed in response to the entrance to the second entrance is more than the first dynamic display, which is the dynamic display executed in response to the entrance to the first entrance. A dynamic display executing means for preferentially executing two dynamic displays, and a stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means as a predetermined mode or the predetermined A mode setting unit that sets a mode different from the mode, and the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display that is executed by the dynamic display executing unit in the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit. Stop display executing means for displaying the stop in the means, and when the second detection means detects the entrance of the game medium, the second dynamic display of the execution order that is executed by the dynamic display executing means is continuous. Of these, all or part of the second dynamic display is If it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the first continuous effect can be executed, the dynamic display executing means determines that the first continuous effect can be executed. A second aspect of the second dynamic display in which the execution order is executed, and a mode control means for controlling all or a part of the second dynamic display stop display mode to be the predetermined mode; A predetermined aspect restriction that restricts the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display from being stopped and displayed in the predetermined form while the first continuous effect is determined not to be executable by the availability determining unit. And a gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the acquired The entry information is stored in the entry information storage means. When the dynamic display is executed on the display means based on the contents of the incoming information storage means, the first dynamic is a dynamic display executed in response to the entrance to the first entrance. The dynamic display execution means preferentially executes the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display executed in response to the entrance to the second entrance, rather than the display. The stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display to be executed is set by the mode setting means in a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode, and the stop display mode is set in the set stop display mode. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the automatic display execution means is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means on the display means. In addition, when the second detection means detects the entry of the game medium, all or a part of the second dynamic display among the second dynamic displays in the order of execution executed by the dynamic display execution means. Whether or not it is possible to execute the first continuous effect in which the display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner is determined by the effect determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the first continuous performance can be executed, all or a part of the second dynamic display of the second dynamic display in the execution order continuous executed by the dynamic display execution unit is performed. It is controlled by the mode control means so that the stop display mode becomes a predetermined mode. On the other hand, while it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the first continuous effect cannot be executed, the predetermined mode restriction means that the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode. Limited. Therefore, even when the stop display mode of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, the first continuous effect is not executed. Since the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display can be stopped and displayed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, the first dynamic display and the first dynamic display and only when the first continuous effect is executed. The second dynamic display can be stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, when the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, the player can easily recognize that the continuous performance is being executed. Can be attracted to the continuous production, and the value of the continuous production can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A1, the dynamic display is executed during the period from the start of execution by the dynamic display execution means until the end of the execution of the dynamic display until a predetermined time elapses. The display stop display mode is configured to be changeable, and the predetermined mode restriction unit counts an elapsed time from the start of execution of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display by the dynamic display execution unit. Time measuring means, first mode determining means for determining whether the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing unit is the predetermined mode, When the elapsed time measured by the time measuring unit exceeds the predetermined time, the first mode determination unit determines that the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is the predetermined mode. And whether or not If it is determined by the means that the first continuous effect cannot be executed, the stop display mode of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is the predetermined mode. Is provided with a first mode change means for changing to another mode.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the dynamic display is performed during the period from the start of execution by the dynamic display execution means until a predetermined time elapses until the execution of the dynamic display ends. The display stop display mode is configured to be changeable, and the elapsed time after the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is started to be executed by the dynamic display executing means is measured by the time measuring means. And when the elapsed time passes the predetermined time, the first mode determination is made that the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means is the predetermined mode. If it is determined by the means and it is determined that the first continuous effect cannot be executed by the effect availability determination means, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed by the dynamic display executing means. Is changed by the first mode changing means to a mode different from the predetermined mode. Therefore, even during a period in which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed, the dynamic display stop display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the predetermined mode until the dynamic display stop display mode cannot be changed. Therefore, the number of times of changing the stop display mode can be suppressed. That is, if the stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed, immediately after changing from a predetermined mode to a mode different from the predetermined mode, the stop display mode of dynamic display cannot be changed thereafter. When the first continuous effect is to be executed by the time, the changed stop display mode must be changed to a predetermined mode again. However, since the stop display mode of dynamic display is changed when the stop display mode of dynamic display cannot be changed, the stop display mode is not changed thereafter. Therefore, since the number of changes in the stop display mode of dynamic display can be suppressed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the second detection means detects the entry of the game medium, the effect availability determination means is the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. If the dynamic display is executed, each dynamic display of the dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the dynamic display ends is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner. The mode control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means when it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the second continuous effect can be executed. The dynamic display and the stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means after the dynamic display is finished are controlled to be the predetermined mode, and the predetermined mode restriction The means determines whether or not the production is possible While the stage determines that the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect cannot be performed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are restricted from being stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A3, if the first detection display or the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means when the second detection means detects the entrance of the game medium, It is possible to execute a second continuous effect in which each dynamic display of the target display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means after the dynamic display ends is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. It is determined by the availability determination means. Here, if it is determined that the second continuous effect can be executed, the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means and the second executed by the dynamic display executing means after the dynamic display ends. The mode control means controls the stop display mode of each dynamic display with the dynamic display to be a predetermined mode. On the other hand, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display may be stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner while it is determined that the first continuous production and the second continuous production are not executable by the production availability determination unit. Restricted by the predetermined mode limiting means. Therefore, the first continuous effect can be executed by the second dynamic display in the execution order that is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the dynamic display being executed and the dynamic display after the dynamic display is completed. Since the second continuous effect can also be executed by the second dynamic display executed by the execution means, it is possible to increase the opportunities for executing the continuous effect.

  In the gaming machine A3, the aspect control means is configured to execute the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means when it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the second continuous effect can be executed. (2) A second mode determination unit that determines whether the stop display mode of dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit; and a mode different from the predetermined mode by the second mode determination unit. When it is determined that it is set, a change process for changing the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit to the predetermined mode is executed. In addition, when the second mode determining unit determines that the predetermined mode is set, the second mode changing unit that does not execute the change process is provided, and the second continuous effect can be executed. Judgment When the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display that has been executed in the case of the second dynamic display is completed, a stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is set by the mode setting unit. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is set in the above-described manner.

  According to the gaming machine A4, when it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the second continuous effect can be executed, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display stop display executed by the dynamic display execution means Whether the mode is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit is determined by the second mode determination unit. When it is determined by the second mode determining means that the mode is different from the predetermined mode, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display stopped by the dynamic display executing unit is stopped. When the change process for changing the display mode to the predetermined mode is executed by the second mode changing unit and the second mode determining unit determines that the display mode is set to the predetermined mode, the second mode changing unit The change process is not executed. And stop of the 2nd dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the 1st dynamic display or the 2nd dynamic display which was performed when it was determined that the 2nd continuous production was executable The display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means. Therefore, when the second continuous effect is executed, if the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing unit is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, the stop display mode is changed. The dynamic display can be stopped and displayed without changing. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is set to the predetermined mode, compared to the case of changing the stop display mode to the predetermined mode, Since the number of executions of the changing process by the second mode changing unit can be suppressed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the effect availability determination means includes a first dynamic display and a first dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means when the second detection means detects the entry of a game medium. It is determined whether or not a third continuous effect for stopping and displaying all or part of the dynamic display among the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous can be executed, The aspect control means includes a first dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means and the first dynamic display when it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the third continuous effect can be executed. And the second dynamic display in which the execution order continues, all or part of the dynamic display stop display mode is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the predetermined mode limiting unit is The first is determined by the production availability determination means. While it is determined that the continuation effect and the third continuation effect cannot be executed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are restricted from being stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner. Characteristic gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the first dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means and the first dynamic display and the execution order are continuous when the second detection means detects the entry of the game medium. In the second dynamic display to be performed, it is determined by the effect availability determination means whether or not the third continuous effect for stopping and displaying all or part of the dynamic display in a predetermined manner can be executed. Here, if it is determined that the third continuous effect can be executed, a first dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, and a second dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous with the first dynamic display. Of these, all or part of the dynamic display stop display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means. On the other hand, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display may be stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner while the first continuous presentation and the third continuous presentation are determined not to be executable by the stage availability determination unit. Restricted by the predetermined mode limiting means. Therefore, the first continuous presentation can be executed by the second dynamic display in which the execution order is executed executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the first dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, Since the third continuous effect can also be executed by the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means after the display is completed, it is possible to increase the opportunities for executing the continuous effect.

  Display means for displaying identification information, a first entrance into which a game medium enters, first detection means for detecting entry of a game medium into the first entrance, and the first entrance And a second entrance for entering the game medium, a second detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the second entrance, and the second detection means or the first detection means. And a peripheral control means for executing dynamic display of identification information on the display means when a game medium entry is detected by the display means, and a main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to the game. In the gaming machine provided, the main control means obtains the entry information associated with the entry when the entry of the game medium is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means. Based on the entry information acquired by the means and the entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entrance, lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and an entrance indicating the entrance where the entrance corresponding to the lottery information is detected Based on the contents of the entrance information storage means for storing the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the information transmission means for transmitting the ball mouth information to the peripheral control means, and the entrance information storage means When instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display, the first dynamic display, which is a dynamic display executed in response to entering the first entrance, is performed. Dynamic display instructing means for preferentially instructing execution of the second dynamic display that is a dynamic display executed in response to the entrance to the two entrances, and the peripheral control means includes the main control 1st dynamic display or 2nd movement instruct | indicated by the dynamic display instruction | indication means of a means The dynamic display executing means for executing display in the display means, and the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means as a predetermined mode or the predetermined mode Is a mode setting means for setting to another mode, and the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means in the stop display mode set by the mode setting means is displayed on the display means. Corresponding to the lottery information received by the information receiving means, the stop display executing means for stopping display, the information receiving means for receiving the lottery information and the entrance information transmitted by the information transmitting means of the main control means Mode information storage means for storing mode information indicating the stop display mode of dynamic display and the entrance indicated by the entrance information received corresponding to the lottery information, and the mode information storage Based on the contents of the means, out of the second dynamic display in the order of execution executed by the dynamic display execution means, all or part of the second dynamic display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner. An execution order to be executed by the dynamic display executing means when it is determined that the first continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determining means for determining whether or not the first continuous effect can be executed. Among the continuous second dynamic displays, the aspect control means for controlling all or a part of the second dynamic display to be stopped to the predetermined aspect, and the effect availability determination means While it is determined that one continuous performance cannot be executed, the predetermined mode limiting unit is configured to limit the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display from being stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode. A gaming machine characterized by 6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, when the first detection means or the second detection means detects the entry of the game medium, the main control means acquires the entry information associated with the entry by the entry information acquisition means. The lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball is acquired by the lottery information acquiring unit based on the acquired incoming ball information. Then, the acquired lottery information and the entrance information indicating the entrance from which the entrance corresponding to the lottery information is detected are transmitted to the peripheral control means by the information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is controlled based on the contents of the entrance information storage means. When the means is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means, the first entrance to the second entrance is greater than the execution of the first dynamic display which is a dynamic display executed in response to the entrance to the first entrance. Execution of the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display executed in response to the entry, is preferentially instructed. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the first executed The stop display mode of the dynamic display or the second dynamic display is set by the mode setting means to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode. Then, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means in the set stop display mode is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means on the display means. In addition, when the lottery information and the entrance information transmitted by the information transmitting unit of the main control unit are received by the information receiving unit, a mode showing a dynamic display stop display mode corresponding to the received lottery information The information and the entrance indicated by the received entrance information are associated with each other and stored in the mode information storage unit, and executed by the dynamic display execution unit based on the contents of the mode information storage unit Of the second dynamic displays in which the order is continuous, whether or not the first continuous effect for stopping and displaying all or part of the second dynamic display in a predetermined manner can be executed is determined by the effect determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the first continuous performance can be executed, all or a part of the second dynamic display of the second dynamic display in the execution order continuous executed by the dynamic display execution unit is performed. It is controlled by the mode control means so that the stop display mode becomes a predetermined mode. On the other hand, while it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the first continuous effect cannot be executed, the predetermined mode restriction means that the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode. Limited. Therefore, even when the stop display mode of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, the first continuous effect is not executed. Since the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display can be stopped and displayed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, the first dynamic display and the first dynamic display and only when the first continuous effect is executed. The second dynamic display can be stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, when the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, the player can easily recognize that the continuous performance is being executed. Can be attracted to the continuous production, and the value of the continuous production can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a stop display effect mode, a stop display result mode, and a stop display sound effect mode. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a stop display effect mode, a stop display display result mode, and a stop display sound effect mode. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is being executed more easily. Therefore, since the player's interest can be further attracted to the continuous performance, the value of the continuous performance can be further increased.

  In addition, when the dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous or the dynamic display in which the execution order is intermittent is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the content of the predetermined mode may be changed for each stop display. For example, in the first stop display, the predetermined mode is a display mode of the stop display, in the second stop display, the predetermined mode is the display result mode of the stop display, and in the third stop display, the predetermined mode is The mode is the mode of the sound effect of the stop display. Thus, if the content of the mode of the stop display is changed, the stop display becomes various, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Display means for displaying identification information; first detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition; and second detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition separately from the first detection means, In a gaming machine that executes dynamic display of identification information on the display means when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means. Of the start information storage means for storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, the start information storage means, and the start information storage means The dynamic display is executed in the display means based on the contents, and is a dynamic display executed in response to the establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. Dynamic display execution means for preferentially executing the second dynamic display, which is a dynamic display executed in response to the establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means over the dynamic display, and its dynamic A mode setting unit that sets one stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the display execution unit from a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode, and the mode setting unit sets In the stopped display mode, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the start condition is determined by the second detecting means. When the establishment is detected, all or a part of the second dynamic display among the second dynamic displays in the order of execution executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the start information storage means. The visual indication An effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the first continuous effect to be stopped and displayed in a fixed manner, and the dynamic display executing means when the effect execution determining means determines to execute the first continuous effect. Of the second dynamic display in the execution order which is executed by the control, so that all or a part of the second dynamic display is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means in the predetermined mode. The first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped in the predetermined manner by the stop display executing means while the first continuous effect is determined not to be executed by the means and the effect execution determining means. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined mode restricting means for restricting display.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, the start information associated with the establishment is acquired by the start information acquisition means, and the acquired start information is started. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the contents of the start information storage means, the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means on the display means. At this time, it is executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means rather than the first dynamic display which is a dynamic display executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. The second dynamic display which is the dynamic display is executed preferentially. The stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display to be executed is set by one mode setting means from a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode, and the stop display mode is dynamically set in the set stop display mode. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the display execution means is stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means. Further, when the second detection means detects that the start condition is established, all of the second dynamic displays in the execution order that are executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the start information storage means Alternatively, it is determined by the effect execution determination unit whether to execute the first continuous effect that stops and displays part of the second dynamic display in a predetermined manner. Here, when it is determined that the first continuous effect is to be executed, all or a part of the second dynamic display is predetermined among the second dynamic displays in the order of execution executed by the dynamic display executing means. In this manner, the control is performed by the aspect control means so as to be stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means. On the other hand, it is predetermined that the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means in a predetermined manner while it is determined that the first continuous effect is not executed by the effect execution determining means. Restricted by the aspect limiting means. Therefore, when the first continuous effect is executed, all or part of the second dynamic display of the second dynamic display in the execution order that is executed by the dynamic display executing means is predetermined. On the other hand, when the first continuous effect is not executed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means are stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. You can limit that. Accordingly, when the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is possible to impress the player that the continuous effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the continuous effect. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display is configured to be able to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display that is being executed until a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display execution means is started. The predetermined mode restriction means is executed by the time display means for measuring an elapsed time since the execution of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display execution means. First mode determining means for determining whether the stopped display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being performed is the predetermined mode, and the elapsed time measured by the time measuring unit is set to the predetermined time. Before the elapse, the first mode determination means determines that the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display stop display mode is the predetermined mode, and the performance execution determination unit determines the first continuous effect. Do not run If it is determined, the first mode change for changing the stop display mode of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit to a mode different from the predetermined mode And the stop display execution means displays the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means in the stop display mode set by the first mode change unit. A gaming machine B2 that is stopped and displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the dynamic display is configured to be able to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display that is being executed until a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display executing means. The elapsed time from the start of execution of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display by the automatic display executing means is measured by the time measuring means. Then, the first mode determination is made that the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is the predetermined mode before the elapsed time has passed the predetermined time. If it is determined by the means and it is determined that the first continuous effect is not executed by the effect execution determining means, the stop display mode of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is The first mode changing unit changes the mode to a mode different from the predetermined mode. Then, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit in the changed mode is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit on the display unit. Therefore, when the first continuous effect is not executed, the stop display mode of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display is different from the predetermined mode within the period in which the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed. Therefore, the dynamic display can be stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner only when the first continuous effect is executed. Therefore, when the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the first mode change unit is configured to cause the first mode determination unit to perform the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display when the elapsed time counted by the timing unit elapses the predetermined time. If the stop display mode is determined to be the predetermined mode and it is determined by the effect execution determination means that the first continuous effect is not executed, the first movement executed by the dynamic display execution means is performed. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the stop display mode of the target display and the second dynamic display is changed to a mode different from the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the elapsed time measured by the time measuring means passes a predetermined time, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display stop display form is the predetermined form by the first form determining means. Is determined, and the stop display mode of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is predetermined. It is changed by the first aspect changing means to another aspect. Therefore, even during a period in which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed, the dynamic display stop display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the predetermined mode until the dynamic display stop display mode cannot be changed. Therefore, the number of times of changing the stop display mode can be suppressed. That is, when the stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed, for example, if the mode is immediately changed from a predetermined mode to a mode different from the predetermined mode, the stop display mode of dynamic display is not changed thereafter. If the first continuous effect is to be executed before it becomes possible, the changed stop display mode must be changed again to a predetermined mode. However, since the stop display mode of dynamic display is changed when the stop display mode of dynamic display cannot be changed, the stop display mode is not changed thereafter. Therefore, since the number of changes in the stop display mode of dynamic display can be suppressed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the effect execution determination means is performed by the second detection means while the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means. If the establishment of the start condition is detected, the dynamic display being executed based on the contents of the start information storage means and the second action executed by the dynamic display execution means after the dynamic display is completed. It is determined whether or not to execute the second continuous effect for stopping and displaying each dynamic display in the predetermined mode, and the mode control means determines to execute the second continuous effect by the effect execution determining unit. The dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means after the dynamic display is finished are the predetermined modes. Execute stop display The predetermined display restricting means controls the stop display executing means while it is determined by the effect execution determining means that the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are not executed. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are restricted from being stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner.

  According to the gaming machine B4, when the second detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied while the dynamic display execution means is executing the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the start information storage is performed. Each dynamic display of the dynamic display being executed based on the contents of the means and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means after the dynamic display is finished is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Whether or not to execute the second continuous effect is determined by the effect execution determination means. Here, when it is determined that the second continuous effect is to be executed, the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means and the second action executed by the dynamic display executing means after the dynamic display is finished. The mode control means controls so that the target display is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, while it is determined by the effect execution determination means that the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are not executed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means in a predetermined manner. This is limited by the predetermined mode limiting means. Therefore, in addition to the first continuous effect, the second continuous effect can also be executed. Therefore, the opportunity for executing the continuous effect can be increased, and the opportunity for the dynamic display to be stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner can be increased. When both the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are not executed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means are restricted from being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. it can. Therefore, when the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is possible to increase the chance of impressing the player that the continuous effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted by the continuous effect. The value of continuous production can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine B4, when the aspect control means determines that the second continuous effect is to be executed by the effect execution determination means, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. Second mode determination means for determining whether the stop display mode of dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit or to a mode different from the predetermined mode, and the second mode determination When it is determined by the means that the mode is different from the predetermined mode, the mode setting unit with respect to the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit And executing the changing process for changing the stop display mode set by the predetermined mode to the predetermined mode, and when the second mode determining means determines that the predetermined mode is set, Second mode changing means for execution, and the mode control means after the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed when it is determined to execute the second continuous effect A gaming machine B5, wherein the stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine B5, when it is determined by the effect execution determining means that the second continuous effect is to be executed, the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means. Whether or not is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting unit or is set to a mode different from the predetermined mode is determined by the second mode determination unit. When it is determined by the second mode determination means that the mode is set to a mode different from the predetermined mode, the mode is set for the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit. When the change process for changing the stop display mode set by the setting unit to the predetermined mode is executed by the second mode changing unit and the second mode determination unit determines that the predetermined mode is set, The changing process by the mode changing unit is not executed. And the stop display of the 2nd dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the 1st dynamic display or the 2nd dynamic display currently performed when it determines with performing a 2nd continuous production is complete | finished The mode is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means. Therefore, when the second continuous effect is executed, if the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing unit is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, the stop display mode is changed. The dynamic display can be stopped and displayed without executing the changing process to be changed. Therefore, when executing the change process for changing the stop display mode to the predetermined mode regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing unit is set to the predetermined mode. Since the number of executions of the changing process by the second mode changing unit can be suppressed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the second detection unit detects that the start condition is satisfied, the effect execution determination unit performs the dynamic display execution based on the content of the start information storage unit. Out of the first dynamic display executed by the means and the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display whose execution order is continuous, all or part of the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner. And determining whether to execute the third continuous effect. When the effect execution determining unit determines that the third continuous effect is to be executed, the mode control unit is executed by the dynamic display executing unit. Among the one dynamic display and the second dynamic display in which the first dynamic display and the execution order are continuous, all or a part of the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. The predetermined mode The limit unit is configured to display the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display by the stop display execution unit while it is determined that the first continuous production and the third continuous production are not executed by the production execution determination unit. The gaming machine B6 is characterized by restricting the stop display in the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the first dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the start information storage means and the first Of the dynamic display and the second dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous, it is determined by the effect execution determination means whether to execute the third continuous effect in which all or a part of the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. Is done. Here, if it is determined that the third continuous effect is to be executed, the first dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous with the first dynamic display. Among them, all or a part of the dynamic display stop display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means. On the other hand, while it is determined by the effect execution determination means that the first continuous effect and the third continuous effect are not executed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means in a predetermined manner. This is limited by the predetermined mode limiting means. Therefore, since the third continuous effect can be executed in addition to the first continuous effect, the opportunity for executing the continuous effect can be increased, and the opportunity for the dynamic display to be stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner can be increased. When both the first continuous effect and the third continuous effect are not executed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit are restricted from being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. it can. Therefore, when the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is possible to increase the chance of impressing the player that the continuous effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted by the continuous effect. The value of continuous production can be further increased.

  Display means for displaying identification information; first detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition; second detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition separately from the first detection means; Peripheral control means for performing control to execute dynamic display of identification information on the display means when the detection means or first detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, and controlling the peripheral control means and controlling the game In a gaming machine comprising main control means for performing control, when the first detection means or the second detection means detects the establishment of a start condition, the main control means provides start information associated with the establishment. Starting information acquiring means for acquiring, lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the starting information, based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means; Information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means and discrimination information capable of discriminating the detecting means in which the establishment of the start condition corresponding to the lottery information is detected to the peripheral control means, Starting information storage means for storing the starting information acquired by the starting information acquisition means, and instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the starting information storage means, Executed in response to establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means rather than execution of the first dynamic display which is dynamic display executed in response to establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. Dynamic display instructing means for preferentially instructing execution of the second dynamic display, which is the dynamic display to be performed, and the peripheral control means is the first instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means 1 dynamic A dynamic display executing means for executing display or second dynamic display in the display means, and a stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means in a predetermined mode. And a first dynamic display or a second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means in a stop display mode set by the mode setting means. Stop display executing means for stopping display on the display means, information receiving means for receiving lottery information and discrimination information transmitted by the information transmitting means of the main control means, and lottery information received by the information receiving means The mode information storage means for storing the mode information indicating the stop display mode of the dynamic display corresponding to, and the discrimination information received corresponding to the lottery information, and the mode information storage unit First of all or a part of the second dynamic display of the second dynamic display in the order of execution executed by the dynamic display executing means is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner based on the contents. An execution execution determination unit for determining whether to execute a continuous effect, and an execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the first execution effect is determined to be executed by the effect execution determination unit. Of the second dynamic display, the aspect control means for controlling the whole or a part of the second dynamic display to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means in the predetermined manner, and the effect execution determination means While it is determined that the first continuous effect is not executed, a predetermined mode for restricting the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display from being stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode by the stop display executing unit. System Gaming machine B7, characterized in that it comprises a means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the establishment of the start information is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means in the main control means, the start information associated with the establishment is acquired by the start information acquisition means and is acquired. Based on the starting information, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the starting information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means. Then, the acquired lottery information and the discriminating information capable of discriminating the detecting means for which the start condition corresponding to the lottery information is detected are transmitted to the peripheral control means by the information transmitting means. When the start information is acquired by the start information acquisition means, the start information is stored in the start information storage means, and the dynamic display instruction means performs the dynamic display based on the contents of the start information storage means. Instructed by the control means. At this time, according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means rather than the execution of the first dynamic display which is a dynamic display executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. Execution of the second dynamic display, which is the dynamic display to be executed, is preferentially instructed. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the first executed The stop display mode of the dynamic display or the second dynamic display is set by one mode setting means among a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode. Then, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means in the set stop display mode is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means on the display means. In addition, when the lottery information and the discrimination information transmitted by the information transmitting unit of the main control unit are received by the information receiving unit, the mode information indicating the dynamic display stop display mode corresponding to the received lottery information; The second dynamic display in which the order of execution executed by the dynamic display execution means is continued based on the contents of the aspect information storage means in association with the received discrimination information and stored in the aspect information storage means. Among them, the effect execution determination means determines whether to execute the first continuous effect that stops or displays all or part of the second dynamic display in a predetermined manner. Here, if it is determined that the first continuous effect is to be executed, all or part of the second dynamic display is stopped among the second dynamic displays in the order of execution executed by the dynamic display executing means. Control is performed by the mode control means so that the display mode is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means in a predetermined mode. On the other hand, it is predetermined that the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means in a predetermined manner while it is determined that the first continuous effect is not executed by the effect execution determining means. Restricted by the aspect limiting means. Therefore, when the first continuous effect is executed, all or part of the second dynamic display of the second dynamic display in the execution order that is executed by the dynamic display executing means is predetermined. On the other hand, when the first continuous effect is not executed, the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means are stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner. You can limit that. Accordingly, when the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is possible to impress the player that the continuous effect is executed, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the continuous effect. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B7, the main control means includes relation information storage means for storing a plurality of relation information indicating the relation between the start information and a lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the start information, and the lottery information acquisition means includes And, when the lottery information is acquired, related information determining means for determining related information used for acquiring the next lottery information among the related information stored in the related information storage means based on the lottery information. When the start information is acquired by the start information acquiring means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the start information based on the start information and the related information determined by the related information determining means A gaming machine B8 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B8, the relation information storage means of the main control means stores a plurality of relation information indicating the relation between the start information and the lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the start information, and the lottery information acquisition means When the lottery information is acquired by the related information, the related information is determined by the related information determination means for the next acquisition of the lottery information among the related information stored in the relation information storage means based on the lottery information. Further, when the start information is acquired by the start information acquisition means, lottery information indicating the lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the start information is based on the start information and the related information determined by the related information determination means. To be acquired. Therefore, every time the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the current start information can be acquired and related information used for acquiring the next lottery information is determined. be able to. Therefore, as soon as the start information is acquired by the start information acquiring means, the lottery information corresponding to the start information can be accurately acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, and the lottery information can be transmitted to the peripheral control means by the information transmitting means.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a stop display effect mode, a stop display result mode, and a stop display sound effect mode. A gaming machine B9 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a stop display effect mode, a stop display result mode, and a stop sound effect mode. Can be more easily recognized by the player that the continuous performance is executed when the display is stopped in a predetermined manner. Therefore, since the player's interest can be further attracted to the continuous performance, the value of the continuous performance can be further increased.

  Note that when the dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous or the dynamic display in which the execution order is intermittent is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the content of the predetermined mode may be changed for each stop display. For example, in the first stop display, the predetermined mode is a display mode of the stop display, in the second stop display, the predetermined mode is the display result mode of the stop display, and in the third stop display, the predetermined mode is The mode is the mode of the sound effect of the stop display. Thus, if the content of the mode of the stop display is changed, the stop display becomes various, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Display means for displaying identification information; first detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition; and second detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition separately from the first detection means, In a gaming machine that executes dynamic display of identification information on the display means when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means. Of the start information storage means for storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, the start information storage means, and the start information storage means Dynamic display of identification information is executed in the display means based on the content, and is executed in response to establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. Dynamic display execution means for preferentially executing second dynamic display that is dynamic display executed in response to establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means over the first dynamic display; A mode setting unit for setting one of a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode as a stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit, and the mode setting unit Stop display executing means for causing the display means to stop display the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means in the stop display mode set by the above, and the dynamic display executing means If the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection means while the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is being executed by the above, based on the state of the dynamic display being executed Stop display of the dynamic display A change determination unit for determining whether to change the mode to the predetermined mode, and the mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the change determination unit determines to change the mode. The mode change unit that changes the stop display mode set by the setting unit to the predetermined mode, and the dynamic display execution unit that executes the dynamic display whose stop display mode is changed by the mode change unit are executed by the dynamic display execution unit. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a mode control unit that controls the predetermined mode to be set by the mode setting unit as a stop display mode of the second dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, the start information associated with the establishment is acquired by the start information acquisition means, and the acquired start information is started. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the contents of the start information storage means, the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means on the display means. At this time, it is executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means rather than the first dynamic display which is a dynamic display executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. The second dynamic display which is the dynamic display is executed preferentially. The stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display to be executed is set by one mode setting means from a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode, and the stop display mode is dynamically set in the set stop display mode. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the display execution means is stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means. Further, when the second detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied while the dynamic display execution means is executing the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the dynamic display being executed is detected. Whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to a predetermined mode is determined by the change determination unit based on the state. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit with respect to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the mode changing unit, and the stop is performed. Control is performed by the mode control means so that a predetermined mode is set as a stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the dynamic display whose display mode has been changed ends. Therefore, since the stop display mode can be changed from a dynamic display that is already being executed to a predetermined mode, the stop display mode is changed from a non-executed dynamic display that is executed next to the dynamic display to a predetermined mode. The stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode more than once. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is continuous to a predetermined mode. It is also possible to increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.

  In the gaming machine C1, the dynamic display executing means is configured to make it difficult for a player to recognize the identification information in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display performed by an identification information group composed of a plurality of identification information. It is executed in the display means in a mode, and thereafter the player changes to a mode in which the identification information can be recognized, and the stop display execution unit is changed to the recognizable mode by the dynamic display execution unit. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is stopped and displayed on the display unit in the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit, and the change determination unit establishes the start condition by the second detection unit. When the detection is detected, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit is changed for the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in the mode difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit. Thus, it is determined whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode, and when the mode change unit determines to change the change display unit, the dynamic display execution unit Changing the stop display mode set by the mode setting means for the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode, and changing the dynamic display stop display mode to the predetermined mode A gaming machine C2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display performed by the identification information group composed of a plurality of identification information in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information is the dynamic display execution means. After that, the mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. Then, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display changed to a recognizable mode is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing unit in the display unit in a mode set by the mode setting unit. When the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit is changed for the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution unit. Thus, the change determination unit changes whether the dynamic display stop display mode is changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit is changed by the mode changing unit for the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in a mode difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display executing unit. As a result, the dynamic display stop display mode is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed because the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display that is dynamically displayed in a mode difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed. In addition, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player. Therefore, the stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Note that examples of the identification information group include a plurality of identification information and an identification information string including a plurality of identification information.

  Moreover, as a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information, a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at high speed is exemplified. Moreover, as a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C2, when the second detection unit detects that the start condition is satisfied, the change determination unit displays a part of the identification information group as a stop display or as a dynamic display execution by the stop display execution unit. If a part of the identification information group is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner by the means, the other identification information group dynamically displayed in the difficult recognition manner by the dynamic display execution means It is determined whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit, and the mode change unit is changed by the change determination unit When the determination is made, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit is changed for the other identification information group that is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution unit, and the dynamic display execution unit Gaming machine C3, characterized in that it is intended to change the display of stop display form in the predetermined manner.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection unit, a part of the identification information group is displayed by the stop display execution unit and a part of the identification information group is displayed by the stop display or dynamic display execution unit. Is displayed in a manner that can be recognized, a stop display mode that is set by the mode setting unit with respect to another identification information group that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit. It is determined by the change determination means whether the dynamic display stop display mode is changed to a predetermined mode by changing. Here, when it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the other identification information group that is dynamically displayed in a mode difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is set by the mode change unit. As a result, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, even when the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution unit and a part of the identification information group is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, Even if it is in a state where a part of the identification information group is dynamically displayed by the execution means in a recognizable manner, the stop display aspect of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means And the stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, in addition to a period in which all of the identification information group is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, a dynamic display stop display mode is also performed in a period in which a part of the identification information group is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize Can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode can be lengthened, the opportunity for changing the dynamic display stop display mode to the predetermined mode to be continuous is increased. Can do. It is also possible to increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the dynamic display executing means is configured to perform the first to nth (n is an integer equal to or larger than 2) identification information sequences configured by a plurality of pieces of identification information. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed on the display means in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information, and then the player is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information. The stop display execution means identifies the first to nth identification information sequences that are dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences. The display unit is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for each information column, and the predetermined mode includes the same identification information in each of the first to nth identification information columns. Stop The change determination means includes a display mode, and when the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the dynamic display execution means moves the second identification information string in a manner in which the recognition is difficult. If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode, the mode change unit determines that the change display unit changes the dynamic display stop mode. Of the second to nth identification information strings dynamically displayed by the means, the stop display mode set by the mode setting means is changed for all or a part of the identification information strings to The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the stop display mode of the target display is changed to the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information, the first to nth (n is an integer equal to or larger than 2) identification information sequences configured by a plurality of pieces of identification information. After the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means in the display means, the mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. Then, the first to nth identification information sequences that are changed to the recognizable mode and dynamically displayed are displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences by the stop display execution means. In the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit, the display unit stops display. The predetermined mode includes a stop display mode in which the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information strings and is stopped and displayed. If the second detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display is stopped. When the display mode is changed to a predetermined mode, the change determination unit determines. Here, when it is determined to be changed, the mode setting is performed for all or a part of the identification information strings among the second to nth identification information strings that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit. The stop display mode set by the means is changed by the mode changing unit, and as a result, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the dynamic display of each of the first to n-th identification information strings is executed, and the first identification information string can be recognized even when the first identification information string is stopped and displayed. Even if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner even in the state of being dynamically displayed in the manner, the second to n-th dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner By changing the stop display mode of all or a part of the identification information sequence up to the identification information sequence up to, the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, in addition to the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. Even during the period before the identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the dynamic display stop display manner can be changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, since the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode can be lengthened, the opportunity for changing the dynamic display stop display mode to the predetermined mode to be a continuous execution order is further increased. Can do. It is also possible to further increase the opportunities for changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.

  Note that the first to n-th identification information strings may be displayed in the first to n-th order on the display means, or may be displayed regardless of the first to n-th order. May be.

  Further, the arrangement of the identification information strings from the first to the n-th may be displayed in any arrangement on the display means. For example, each identification information column may be displayed as a vertical column and arranged in order in the horizontal direction, or each identification information column may be displayed as a horizontal column and displayed in a sequence arranged in the vertical direction. Alternatively, the identification information columns may be displayed in an oblique arrangement, arranged in parallel and shifted in order. Moreover, each identification information row | line | column may be arrange | positioned and displayed on the straight line.

  Further, a predetermined display may include a stop display mode in which predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the first to nth identification information strings.

  In the gaming machine C4, the change determination means includes first identification information determination means for determining whether or not the same identification information is stopped and displayed in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings. And when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the same identification information is assigned to each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings by the first identification information determination means. If the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize manner by the dynamic display executing means, the dynamic display stop display manner is set as the predetermined manner. And the mode changing means sets the mode setting for the nth identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means when it is determined by the change determining means to change. Stop set by means Gaming machine C5, characterized in that by changing the display mode is to change the dynamic display of the stop display form in the predetermined manner.

  According to the gaming machine C5, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the first identification information determination means is identical to each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings. If it is determined that the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display executing means dynamically displays the nth identification information string in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the dynamic display stop display mode is changed to a predetermined mode. If it changes, it will be determined by the change determination means. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the nth identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed by the mode changing unit, As a result, the stop display mode of dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when each of the identification information strings from the first to the (n-1) th is stopped and displayed, dynamic display in which the same identification information is stopped and displayed on each of the identification information strings is executed. Even if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner, it is dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner. It is possible to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to a predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode of the nth identification information sequence. In other words, in addition to the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the nth Even during the period before the identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the dynamic display stop display manner can be changed to a predetermined manner. Accordingly, since the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode can be further increased, the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode to the predetermined mode in which the execution order is continuous are further increased. be able to. It is also possible to further increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, in the dynamic display, the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner, and then the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. A processable dynamic display capable of executing a changing process for changing the stop display mode of the identification information sequence that is dynamically displayed by the mode changing means, and the (n-1) th identification information sequence There is provided an unprocessable dynamic display incapable of executing the change process by the form changing means between the dynamic display in the recognizable mode and the stop of the display of the nth identification information sequence. The change determination means is configured to detect each identification information sequence from first to (n-1) th by the first identification information determination means when the second detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. The same identification information is stopped and displayed on each If it is determined and the dynamic display execution means is executing the processable dynamic display, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode, and the mode change unit is configured to determine the change determination. If it is determined to be changed by the means, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the nth identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the display stop display mode is changed to the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the dynamic display includes a period from when the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. A processable dynamic display capable of executing a change process for changing the stop display mode of the identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the mode changing means and a mode in which the (n-1) th identification information sequence can be recognized. An unprocessable dynamic display is provided in which the change process by the mode changing means cannot be executed during the period from the initial display until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Then, when the establishment of the starting condition is detected by the second detection means, the same identification information is stopped and displayed in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings by the first identification information determination means. If the dynamic display executing means is executing the processable dynamic display, the change determining means determines that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the nth identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed by the mode changing unit, As a result, the stop display mode of dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, when dynamic display that can be processed is executed by the dynamic display executing means and the same identification information is stopped and displayed in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, the nth If the identification information string is before the stop display, the change processing by the aspect changing means can be executed to change the stop display mode of the dynamically displayed identification information to a predetermined mode. It is possible to determine whether to change the stop display mode of dynamic display to a predetermined mode before the column is stopped and displayed by the change determination unit. Therefore, since the time limit that can be determined by the change determination unit can be delayed, the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to a predetermined mode can be further extended. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the chances of changing the stop display mode of dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous to a predetermined mode. It is also possible to further increase the chance of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the dynamic display executing means is configured to perform the first to nth (n is an integer equal to or larger than 2) identification information sequences configured by a plurality of pieces of identification information. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed on the display means in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information, and then the player is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information. The stop display execution means includes the first to nth identification information sequences that are dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences. In the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for each identification information column, the display unit stops display, and the predetermined mode is that the identification information of each of the first to nth identification information columns is stopped and displayed. And stop table If the identification information lined up is the same, only one different identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information line in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the identification information is determined in advance. Including a stop display mode that is information, and the change determination means stops display with the same identification information of each of the first to (n-1) th identification information columns on the identification information line. Second identification information determination means for determining whether or not the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the first identification information on the line of the identification information by the second identification information determination means. It is determined that the identification information of each identification information sequence up to (n-1) is the same and is stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display executing means determines that the nth identification information sequence is a dynamic table in a manner that is difficult to recognize. If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode, and the mode change unit is determined to be changed by the change determination unit, the dynamic display execution unit Changing the stop display mode set by the mode setting means for the n-th identification information sequence being dynamically displayed, and changing the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode A gaming machine C7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C7, in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information, the first to nth (n is an integer equal to or greater than 2) identification information strings configured by connecting a plurality of identification information. After the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means in the display means, the mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. Then, the first to nth identification information sequences that are changed to the recognizable mode and dynamically displayed are displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences by the stop display execution means. In the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit, the display unit stops display. In the predetermined mode, the identification information in the first to nth identification information strings is stopped and displayed, and if the identification information that is stopped and displayed is the same, a predetermined game value is given to the player. On the identification information line, only one different identification information is stopped and displayed, and the identification information includes a stop display mode in which the identification information is predetermined identification information. Further, when the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the identification information of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings is the same on the identification information line and is stopped and displayed. Then, if it is determined by the second identification information determination means and the dynamic display execution means is dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize, the dynamic display stop display aspect is set as a predetermined aspect. When it is changed to, it is determined by the change determination means. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the nth identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed by the mode changing unit, As a result, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when each identification information sequence from the first to the (n-1) th is stopped and displayed, a dynamic display in which the same identification information is stopped and displayed on each identification information sequence on the identification information line is displayed. When executed, it is difficult to recognize if the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, regardless of the mode of each of the first to (n-1) th identification information sequences. By changing the stop display mode of the nth identification information sequence that is dynamically displayed in the mode, the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode. In other words, in addition to the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the nth Even during the period before the identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the dynamic display stop display manner can be changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, since the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode can be extended, the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode to the predetermined mode in which the execution order is continuous are further increased. Can do. It is also possible to further increase the opportunities for changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.

  Note that the first to n-th identification information strings may be displayed in the first to n-th order on the display means, or may be displayed regardless of the first to n-th order. May be.

  Further, the arrangement of the identification information strings from the first to the n-th may be displayed in any arrangement on the display means. For example, each identification information column may be displayed as a vertical column and arranged in order in the horizontal direction, or each identification information column may be displayed as a horizontal column and displayed in a sequence arranged in the vertical direction. Alternatively, the identification information columns may be displayed in an oblique arrangement, arranged in parallel and shifted in order. Moreover, each identification information row | line | column may be arrange | positioned and displayed on the straight line.

  Further, a predetermined display may include a stop display mode in which predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the first to nth identification information strings.

  In the gaming machine C7, the dynamic display includes a period from when the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. A processable dynamic display capable of executing a change process for changing the stop display mode of the identification information sequence that is dynamically displayed by the mode change means, and the (n-1) th identification information sequence is recognized. There is provided an unprocessable dynamic display incapable of executing the change process by the form changing means between the dynamic display in a possible mode and the stop of the display of the nth identification information sequence. The change determination means, from the first to the (n-1) th on the line of the identification information by the second identification information determination means, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection means. The identification information in each identification information column is the same. If it is determined that the display is stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display executing means has executed the processable dynamic display, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode, and the mode change And a means for displaying a stop display mode set by the mode setting unit with respect to the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit when it is determined to be changed by the change determination unit. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that it changes and changes the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the dynamic display includes a period from when the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. A processable dynamic display capable of executing a change process for changing the stop display mode of the identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the mode changing means and a mode in which the (n-1) th identification information sequence can be recognized. An unprocessable dynamic display is provided in which the change process by the mode changing means cannot be executed during the period from the initial display until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Then, when the establishment of the starting condition is detected by the second detection means, the same identification information is stopped and displayed in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings by the first identification information determination means. If the dynamic display executing means is executing the processable dynamic display, the change determining means determines that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the nth identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed by the mode changing unit, As a result, the stop display mode of dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, when dynamic display that can be processed is executed by the dynamic display executing means and the same identification information is stopped and displayed in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, the nth If the identification information string is before the stop display, the change processing by the aspect changing means can be executed to change the stop display mode of the dynamically displayed identification information to a predetermined mode. It is possible to determine whether to change the stop display mode of dynamic display to a predetermined mode before the column is stopped and displayed by the change determination unit. Therefore, since the time limit that can be determined by the change determination unit can be delayed, the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to a predetermined mode can be further extended. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the chances of changing the stop display mode of dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous to a predetermined mode. It is also possible to further increase the chance of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the mode setting unit corresponds to a mode selection unit that selects one mode from a plurality of modes including the predetermined mode, and a mode selected by the mode selection unit Identification information acquisition means for acquiring the identification information group to be performed, and identification information storage means for storing the identification information group acquired by the identification information acquisition means, wherein the stop display execution means is provided by the dynamic display execution means. After the dynamic display is executed, the identification information group stored in the identification information storage unit is stopped and displayed on the display unit, and the mode changing unit is determined to be changed by the change determining unit. Among the identification information groups stored in the identification information storage means, those corresponding to the identification information groups that are dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize manner by the dynamic display execution means Further to the gaming machine and characterized in that to change the dynamic display of the stop display form in the predetermined manner C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, when one mode is selected from a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode by the mode selection unit, an identification information group corresponding to the selected mode is acquired by the identification information acquisition unit. The identification information group is stored in the identification information storage means. When the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, the identification information group stored in the identification information storage means is then stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means on the display means. And if it determines with a change determination means changing, it will correspond to the identification information group currently displayed by the dynamic display execution means in the form difficult to recognize among the identification information groups memorize | stored in the identification information storage means. What is to be changed is changed by the mode changing means, and as a result, the stop display mode of dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, regardless of the identification information group being executed by the dynamic display execution means, among the identification information groups stored in the identification information storage means, the identification information group that has not yet been stopped or is operated in a manner that is difficult to recognize. It is possible to change the dynamic display stop display mode to a predetermined mode only by changing the identification information group that is automatically displayed. Therefore, the dynamic display stop display mode can be easily changed to a predetermined mode.

  Display means for displaying identification information; first detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition; second detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined start condition separately from the first detection means; Peripheral control means for performing control to execute dynamic display of identification information on the display means when the detection means or first detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, and controlling the peripheral control means and controlling the game In a gaming machine comprising main control means for performing control, when the first detection means or the second detection means detects the establishment of a start condition, the main control means provides start information associated with the establishment. Starting information acquisition means for acquiring, starting information storage means for storing the starting information acquired by the starting information acquisition means, and execution of the dynamic display based on the contents of the starting information storage means Instructing the control means by the second detection means rather than executing the first dynamic display which is a dynamic display executed in response to the establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. The start information is acquired by the dynamic display instruction means that preferentially instructs the execution of the second dynamic display, which is the dynamic display executed in response to the establishment of the detected start condition, and the start information acquisition means. Information transmission means for transmitting to the peripheral control means discriminating information capable of discriminating the detection means for which the establishment of the start condition corresponding to the start information is detected, and the peripheral control means comprises the main control A dynamic display executing means for executing the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instructing means in the display means, and a first dynamic executed by the dynamic display executing means. Display or second action A mode setting means for setting one display stop display mode from a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode, and a first display executed by the dynamic display execution unit in a stop display mode set by the mode setting unit Stop display execution means for stopping and displaying dynamic display or second dynamic display on the display means, information receiving means for receiving the discrimination information transmitted by the information transmission means of the main control means, and the dynamic display execution If the determination information is received by the information receiving means while the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is being executed by the means, the second detection means determines the start condition based on the determination information. An information determination unit that determines whether establishment is detected, and the dynamic determination execution unit that determines whether the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection unit by the information determination unit. A change determination means for determining whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode based on the state of the dynamic display being executed, and when it is determined to be changed by the change determination unit A mode changing unit that changes the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit to the predetermined mode with respect to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing unit, and a stop display mode by the mode changing unit. A mode control for controlling the predetermined mode to be set by the mode setting unit as the stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the dynamic display whose change has been completed And a gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, when the main control means detects the establishment of the start information by the first detection means or the second detection means, the start information accompanying the establishment is acquired by the start information acquisition means, and the start information Is stored in the starting information storage means. Based on the contents of the start information storage means, the dynamic display instruction means instructs the peripheral control means to execute dynamic display. At this time, according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means rather than the execution of the first dynamic display which is a dynamic display executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. Execution of the second dynamic display, which is the dynamic display to be executed, is preferentially instructed. Further, when the start information is acquired by the start information acquiring means, determination information capable of determining the detection means in which the start condition corresponding to the start information is detected is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the information transmitting means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the first executed The stop display mode of the dynamic display or the second dynamic display is set by one mode setting means among a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode. Then, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means in the set stop display mode is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means on the display means. Further, when the determination information transmitted by the information transmission unit of the main control unit is received by the information reception unit while the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution unit, Based on the determination information, the information determination unit determines whether the second detection unit detects the start condition. Here, when it is determined by the information determining means that the start condition is detected by the second detecting means, the dynamic display is stopped based on the state of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means. Whether to change the mode to a predetermined mode is determined by the change determination unit. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit with respect to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the mode changing unit, and the stop is performed. Control is performed by the mode control means so that a predetermined mode is set as a stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the dynamic display whose display mode has been changed ends.

  Therefore, since the stop display mode can be changed from a dynamic display that is already being executed to a predetermined mode, the stop display mode is changed from a non-executed dynamic display that is executed next to the dynamic display to a predetermined mode. The stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode more than once. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is continuous to a predetermined mode. It is also possible to increase the chance of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is continuous to a predetermined mode.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a stop display effect mode, a stop display result mode, and a stop display sound effect mode. A gaming machine C11 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a stop display effect mode, a stop display result mode, and a stop sound effect mode. It is possible to make the player recognize that the stop display mode of the dynamic display that is continuous or intermittent is set to a predetermined mode, and to attract the player's interest.

  In addition, when the stop display mode of dynamic display in which the execution order is continuous or intermittent is changed to a predetermined mode, the content of the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the stop display effect, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the display result of the stop display. The predetermined mode is set as the sound effect mode of the stop display. Thus, if the contents of the stop display mode in the dynamic display are changed in order, the stop display becomes various, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine D1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine D2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine D3 that is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device or the like is used to produce a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) or the like to improve the interest of games. The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when the game ball starts (wins) at the start port (start port), and is, for example, 3 × 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in each cell. More specifically, when a game ball wins a start opening, scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. To do. In such a variation effect, a device is devised to give the player a sense of expectation by executing an effect that suggests in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous for the player.
In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous to the player, the display of chances and the like is not limited to one variation effect, but continuously over a plurality of variation effects. There are games that are configured to be performed periodically or intermittently, or those that perform the same or different performance multiple times continuously or intermittently with display or sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “continuous performance”), and advantageous games The game has been further improved in interest, such as giving players a sense of expectation of the state. Note that the chance eyes are, for example, stop symbols other than winning, and stop symbols (display results) including predetermined symbols (for example, symbols such as “3”, “4”, and “1”), respectively. Aspect). For example, when a game ball wins a start opening, if a plurality of variation effects to be started are reserved, the continuous effects are performed for the plurality of variation effects held (for example, “Patent Document”). 1: Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383 ”).
However, in order to perform a continuous effect, there are two or more reserved variable effects, so there is a problem that a continuous effect cannot be performed when only one variable effect is reserved.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the chances of performing a continuous performance.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a display unit that displays identification information, a first detection unit that detects the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a predetermined unit separately from the first detection unit. Second detection means for detecting that the start condition is satisfied, and when the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the display means. When the establishment of the start condition is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means, the start information acquisition means for acquiring the start information associated with the establishment, and the start information acquisition means Start information storage means for storing start information, and dynamic display of identification information on the display means based on the contents of the start information storage means, which is detected by the first detection means The second dynamic display that is executed in response to the establishment of the start condition detected by the second detecting means is more than the first dynamic display that is a dynamic display that is executed in response to the establishment of the start condition. A plurality of modes including a predetermined mode of a dynamic display execution unit that preferentially executes dynamic display and a stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display that is executed by the dynamic display execution unit A mode setting means for setting one of the above, and the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means in the stop display mode set by the mode setting means. The second detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied while the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is being executed by the stop display executing means for stopping the display and the dynamic display executing means. If that is running A change determination unit that determines whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode based on a state of the dynamic display, and the dynamic display when the change determination unit determines to change the dynamic display A mode changing unit that changes the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit to the predetermined mode with respect to the dynamic display being executed by the execution unit, and a motion whose stop display mode has been changed by the mode changing unit. And a mode control means for controlling the predetermined mode to be set by the mode setting unit as a stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the target display is completed. Yes.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the dynamic display execution unit is configured to perform the first dynamic display or the first dynamic display performed by an identification information group including a plurality of identification information. 2 dynamic display is performed in the display means in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information, and then changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the stop display execution means, The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display changed to the recognizable mode by the dynamic display execution unit is stopped and displayed on the display unit in the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit, and the change When the second detection unit detects that the start condition is satisfied, the determination unit is configured to detect the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution unit. It is determined whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode set by the determination unit, and the mode change unit is determined to be changed by the change determination unit. The dynamic display execution means changes the stop display mode set by the mode setting means for the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode, and stops the dynamic display. The display mode is changed to the predetermined mode.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the change determination unit is configured to execute the stop display execution unit when the start condition is detected by the second detection unit. If a part of the identification information group is stopped or displayed, or if a part of the identification information group is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode by the dynamic display execution unit, the recognition is difficult by the dynamic display execution unit. It is determined whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the other identification information group dynamically displayed in The mode changing unit sets the mode for another identification information group that is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display executing unit when it is determined to be changed by the change determining unit. To the means Ri by changing the stop display mode is set is to change the dynamic display of the stop display form in the predetermined manner.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the dynamic display execution unit includes a first to an nth (n The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display performed by the identification information sequence up to 2) is executed on the display means in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information, and then the player Is changed to a mode capable of recognizing identification information, and the stop display execution means is a first to nth identification information sequence dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode by the dynamic display execution means. Are stopped and displayed on the display means in the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences, and the predetermined mode is the first to Each of the identification information sequence up to the nth Including a stop display mode in which the same identification information is included and stop-displayed, and the change determination unit is configured to perform a first display by the dynamic display execution unit when the second detection unit detects that the start condition is satisfied. If the identification information string of 2 is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize aspect, it is determined that the stop display aspect of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined aspect, and the aspect changing means is When it is determined to change, the mode setting means for all or a part of the second to nth identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Is changed to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit, the start information associated with the establishment is acquired by the start information acquisition unit and is acquired. The starting information is stored in the starting information storage means. Based on the contents of the start information storage means, the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means on the display means. At this time, it is executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the second detection means rather than the first dynamic display which is a dynamic display executed according to the establishment of the start condition detected by the first detection means. The second dynamic display which is the dynamic display is executed preferentially. The stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display to be executed is set by one mode setting means from a plurality of modes including a predetermined mode, and the stop display mode is dynamically set in the set stop display mode. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display executed by the display execution means is stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means. Further, when the second detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied while the dynamic display execution means is executing the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the dynamic display being executed is detected. Whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to a predetermined mode is determined by the change determination unit based on the state. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit with respect to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the mode changing unit, and the stop is performed. Control is performed by the mode control means so that a predetermined mode is set as a stop display mode of the second dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the dynamic display whose display mode has been changed ends. Therefore, since the stop display mode can be changed from the dynamic display already being executed to the predetermined mode, the stop display mode is changed from the unexecuted dynamic display to be executed next to the dynamic display to the predetermined mode. The stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode more than once. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is continuous to a predetermined mode. It is also possible to increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the identification information group constituted by a plurality of identification information in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information. After the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display to be performed is executed by the dynamic display executing unit, the mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information by the dynamic display executing unit. Then, the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display changed to a recognizable mode is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing unit in the display unit in a mode set by the mode setting unit. When the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection means, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit is changed for the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution unit. Thus, the change determination unit changes whether the dynamic display stop display mode is changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit is changed by the mode changing unit for the identification information group that is dynamically displayed in a mode difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display executing unit. As a result, the dynamic display stop display mode is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed because the stop display mode of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display that is dynamically displayed in a mode difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed. In addition, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.
Note that examples of the identification information group include a plurality of identification information and an identification information string including a plurality of identification information.
Moreover, as a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information, a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at high speed is exemplified. Moreover, as a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed is exemplified.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second detection unit, the identification information group is displayed by the stop display execution unit. Is displayed dynamically in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means if part of the identification information group is dynamically displayed in a manner that can be recognized by the stop display or dynamic display execution means By changing the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for another identification information group, the change determination unit determines whether to change the stop display mode of the dynamic display to a predetermined mode. Here, when it is determined to be changed, the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit for the other identification information group that is dynamically displayed in a mode difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is set by the mode change unit. As a result, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, even when the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution unit and a part of the identification information group is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, Even if it is in a state where a part of the identification information group is dynamically displayed by the execution means in a recognizable manner, the stop display aspect of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means And the stop display mode of dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, in addition to a period in which all of the identification information group is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, a dynamic display stop display mode is also performed in a period in which a part of the identification information group is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize Can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode can be lengthened, the opportunity for changing the dynamic display stop display mode to the predetermined mode to be continuous is increased. There is an effect that can be. It is also possible to increase the chances of changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, a plurality of pieces of identification information are configured in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information. After the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display performed by the first to n-th identification information sequence (n is an integer of 2 or more) is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, The mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. Then, the first to nth identification information sequences that are changed to the recognizable mode and dynamically displayed are displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences by the stop display execution means. In the stop display mode set by the mode setting unit, the display unit stops display. The predetermined mode includes a stop display mode in which the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information strings and is stopped and displayed. If the second detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display is stopped. When the display mode is changed to a predetermined mode, the change determination unit determines. Here, when it is determined to be changed, the mode setting is performed for all or a part of the identification information strings among the second to nth identification information strings that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit. The stop display mode set by the means is changed by the mode changing unit, and as a result, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed is changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the dynamic display of each of the first to n-th identification information strings is executed, and the first identification information string can be recognized even when the first identification information string is stopped and displayed. Even if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner even in the state of being dynamically displayed in the manner, the second to n-th dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner By changing the stop display mode of all or a part of the identification information sequence up to the identification information sequence up to, the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, in addition to the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. Even during the period before the identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the dynamic display stop display manner can be changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, since the period during which the dynamic display stop display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode can be lengthened, the opportunity for changing the dynamic display stop display mode to the predetermined mode to be a continuous execution order is further increased. There is an effect that can be. It is also possible to further increase the opportunities for changing the dynamic display stop display mode in which the execution order is intermittent to a predetermined mode.
Note that the first to n-th identification information strings may be displayed in the first to n-th order on the display means, or may be displayed regardless of the first to n-th order. May be.
Further, the arrangement of the identification information strings from the first to the n-th may be displayed in any arrangement on the display means. For example, each identification information column may be displayed as a vertical column and arranged in order in the horizontal direction, or each identification information column may be displayed as a horizontal column and displayed in a sequence arranged in the vertical direction. Alternatively, each identification information column may be an oblique column, and may be displayed in an arrangement that is shifted in parallel and arranged in order. Moreover, each identification information row | line | column may be arrange | positioned and displayed on the straight line.
Further, a predetermined display may include a stop display mode in which predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the first to nth identification information strings.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance A (part of entrance means)
640 First entrance B (part of entrance means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
203a Special figure A reserved ball storage area (entrance information storage means)
203b Special figure B reserved ball storage area (entrance information storage means)
208a First start port A switch (detection means)
208b First start port B switch (detection means)
S306, S307 Dynamic display execution means S402 Lottery execution means S406, S407 Dynamic display time determination means S604, S634 Entrance information acquisition means S1106 to S1112, S1803 Change availability determination means S1106 to S1112, S1808 Change availability determination means S1309, S1311 some of the stop display hand stage S1606 behavior setting unit S1902 first changing means S2108 changeable period setting means

Claims (2)

Display means for displaying identification information;
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter,
Detecting means for detecting the entrance of the game ball to the entrance means;
If the incoming ball game ball is detected by the detection means, a game machine that includes a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information composed of a plurality of the identification information on the display means In
When an entry of a game ball is detected by the detection means, an entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means;
Entry information storage means for storing the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means;
Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time when starting dynamic display of the identification information based on the entrance information stored in the entrance information storage means;
As the stop display mode in the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display execution means, from among a plurality of embodiments, including certain aspects, mode setting means for setting one of the mode corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery execution means When,
In the set stop display mode by the mode setting means, a stop display hand stage to stop displaying the dynamic display that is performed by the dynamic display execution means in said display means,
While the dynamic display is stopped and displayed at the stop display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the off is performed by the dynamic display execution means, a new ball entrance information is acquired by the entering sphere information acquiring means A change permission determination unit that determines whether a stop display mode in the dynamic display already executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to the predetermined mode within the determined dynamic display time;
A first changing unit that changes the stop display mode in the dynamic display already executed by the dynamic display executing unit to the predetermined mode when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determining unit;
Corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, a changeable period setting means for setting a period determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode by the changeability determination means;
A change restricting means for restricting a change to the predetermined mode by the first changing means when a predetermined number or more of the entering information is stored in the entering information storing means ,
The predetermined aspects of the stop display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the out-game machine, wherein the plurality of identification information is an aspect that is displayed stopped by a combination of specific predetermined.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is provided at a position where a player can visually recognize the display.

Images